3M COMMAND 17001 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD 3M COMMAND 17001 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: 17001 To Apply command.com 1 2 3 SIDE RED BLACK SIDE To Remove The following statements only apply to products distributed in the USA. Limited Warranty: This If this 3M product product is will defective, be free your from exclusive defects in remedy material shall and be, manufacture. at 3M’s option, replacement of the product or refund of the purchase price. Limitation of Liability: 3M whether will not direct, be liable indirect, for any special, loss incidental or damage or arising consequential. from this product, Not intended for picture hanging. Instead Hanging use Strips, CommandSawtooth TM Picture or Wire-Backed Hangers. Hooks can be reused with CommandTM Medium Strips. 4 CLEAN surface with wipe isopropyl gently, rubbing let dry. alcohol, Do not use SEPARATE household strips. cleaners. REMOVE RED liner. REMOVE BLACK liner. PRESS to surface PRESS adhesive to hook. for 10 seconds. 5 UP 6 7 8 1 HOUR 30 SECONDS DOWN IMPORTANT: holding For strength maximum slide hook off. And for press 30 seconds. base FIRMLY Slide hook ON. Wait 1 hour before use. 1 UP 2 3 STRAIGHT DOWN WOSY LL4 12" 30 cm Slide hook up to remove NEVER pull strip Hold base gently to STRETCH STRAIGHT from mounting base. towards you. prevent snapping base fingers. from DOWN AT LEAST ALONG 12 INCHES WALL DO NOT against press wall. base (30 and cm) strip until release. base IMPORTANT: Failure to follow instructions carefully may cause damage! SAVE INSTRUCTIONS for damage-free removal or visit command.com For questions, ideas and special offers go to command.com CAUTION: DO NOT use with wallpaper. May not DO NOT adhere use well for to antiques, vinyl surfaces. heirlooms, or other valuable or irreplaceable hang items over items. beds. DO Use NOT only one hook per item hung. NOTE: Apply to surfaces above 50°F (10°C). adhesion Adhesive above 105°F could (40°C). lose


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A&P INSTRUMENTS ULTRA X 3011 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD A&P INSTRUMENTS ULTRA X 3011 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: aULTRA X 3011 ULTRA X 3011D &p instruments Moisture analyser To determine the moisture content in almost all liquid, solid and paste-like materials. The principle is: drying with simultaneous Suitable for use in operations directly in production facilities and laboratories. Almost 70 years of experience with modern technology forms the basis for the ULTRA X moisture analyser. Precision weighing technology, simple operation, good functionality and design and a robust structure are combined in a practice-oriented manner. Operating temp. C° time Weigh the sample, pivot the radiator above it, the measurement 45 T starts automatically and ends when the weight is constant. All of the parameters can be changed in the menu using three mode value (weight) unit buttons. The menu is shown in the LC display. The radiation temperature can be set. In addition to the moisture and solid material, additional measurement parameters can also optionally be displayed.The moisture content can be deter- mined using a timer or the automatic cut-out. Three criteria are individually set for the automatic cut-out depending on the product properties: query start, weight reduction and query interval. The measurement result remains on the display until the device is next used. The reusable stainless steel sample dishes mean an ongoing cost saving. ULTRA X 3011D moisture analyser 3 The ULTRA X 3011 can optionally be delivered with or without a built-in printer. The printout of all data is carried out in line with GLP. Intermediate values can be printed out at selectable intervals as needed. All of the data are also output via the serial RS 232 interface and USB. The printer can be switched off. a&p instruments, Albert-Schweitzer-Str. 16, D-32758 Detmold, Tel. 05232/97780, E-Mail: info@apinstruments.de Technical Data ULTRA X 3011 / ULTRA X 3011D Balance: weighing range 210 g resolution 0.001 g sample volume max. 95 cm3 drying bowl 110 mm diameter For Moisture measuring: sample weight any, recommended minimum 4 g power of heater 250 watts automatic automatic drying until weight constant selectable in 3 different modes: start measuring, measuring in intervals, weight loss/ measured during intervals. timer 1 - 180 minutes temperarture selectable from 40 °C up to 180 °C measured values % moisture % dry mass % moisture ad actual sample weight g solids per kg measuring accuracy 0.01% device identification 4-digit ID for identifying the device menu lock the menu to prevent accidantal changes to drying parameters cal function is further available. Communication: data output interface V24 RS 232 data signals all weight and measuring data in GLP-format with start time and variable interval print out selectable date, time, total measuring time, type of sample with Software ULTRA X DataChannel to transfer on PC as .xls data to Microsoft Excel, .html date, .xml date and For using: .txt date. power supply 230 V 20%/ + 15 % 48 63 Hz power consump. 275 VA dimensions approx. l 385 x w 275 x h 420 mm over all weight approx. 8.5 kg Accessories: Part no: Using: stainless-steel drying tray 1000282 sample tongs (2 sets supplied with the device) tray tongs 1000230 for lifting the tray (supplied with the device) power cable 1000190 power supply (supplied with the device) calibtion weight F1 200 g 1000403 for claibrating the balance aluminium foils 130 mm x 0.01 mm 1000016 for lining the drying tray aluminium foils 130 mm x 0.03 mm 1000017 for lining the drying tray foil press 1000062 for shaping the aluminium foil Consumables: paper for printer 58 mm 1000234 for integrated printer durable 10 years, according to manufacturer

infrared heater 1000130 sparepart subject to technical modification

a & p instruments e.K. Inh. Peter Ukena Albert-Schweitzer-Straße 16, D-32758 Detmold, Tel. +49 (0)5232 9778-0, Fax +49 (0)5232 9778-20 Internet: apinstruments.de, Email: info@apinstruments.de


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

A&P INSTRUMENTS ULTRA X 3011D (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD A&P INSTRUMENTS ULTRA X 3011D (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: aULTRA X 3011 ULTRA X 3011D &p instruments Moisture analyser To determine the moisture content in almost all liquid, solid and paste-like materials. The principle is: drying with simultaneous Suitable for use in operations directly in production facilities and laboratories. Almost 70 years of experience with modern technology forms the basis for the ULTRA X moisture analyser. Precision weighing technology, simple operation, good functionality and design and a robust structure are combined in a practice-oriented manner. Operating temp. C° time Weigh the sample, pivot the radiator above it, the measurement 45 T starts automatically and ends when the weight is constant. All of the parameters can be changed in the menu using three mode value (weight) unit buttons. The menu is shown in the LC display. The radiation temperature can be set. In addition to the moisture and solid material, additional measurement parameters can also optionally be displayed.The moisture content can be deter- mined using a timer or the automatic cut-out. Three criteria are individually set for the automatic cut-out depending on the product properties: query start, weight reduction and query interval. The measurement result remains on the display until the device is next used. The reusable stainless steel sample dishes mean an ongoing cost saving. ULTRA X 3011D moisture analyser 3 The ULTRA X 3011 can optionally be delivered with or without a built-in printer. The printout of all data is carried out in line with GLP. Intermediate values can be printed out at selectable intervals as needed. All of the data are also output via the serial RS 232 interface and USB. The printer can be switched off. a&p instruments, Albert-Schweitzer-Str. 16, D-32758 Detmold, Tel. 05232/97780, E-Mail: info@apinstruments.de Technical Data ULTRA X 3011 / ULTRA X 3011D Balance: weighing range 210 g resolution 0.001 g sample volume max. 95 cm3 drying bowl 110 mm diameter For Moisture measuring: sample weight any, recommended minimum 4 g power of heater 250 watts automatic automatic drying until weight constant selectable in 3 different modes: start measuring, measuring in intervals, weight loss/ measured during intervals. timer 1 - 180 minutes temperarture selectable from 40 °C up to 180 °C measured values % moisture % dry mass % moisture ad actual sample weight g solids per kg measuring accuracy 0.01% device identification 4-digit ID for identifying the device menu lock the menu to prevent accidantal changes to drying parameters cal function is further available. Communication: data output interface V24 RS 232 data signals all weight and measuring data in GLP-format with start time and variable interval print out selectable date, time, total measuring time, type of sample with Software ULTRA X DataChannel to transfer on PC as .xls data to Microsoft Excel, .html date, .xml date and For using: .txt date. power supply 230 V 20%/ + 15 % 48 63 Hz power consump. 275 VA dimensions approx. l 385 x w 275 x h 420 mm over all weight approx. 8.5 kg Accessories: Part no: Using: stainless-steel drying tray 1000282 sample tongs (2 sets supplied with the device) tray tongs 1000230 for lifting the tray (supplied with the device) power cable 1000190 power supply (supplied with the device) calibtion weight F1 200 g 1000403 for claibrating the balance aluminium foils 130 mm x 0.01 mm 1000016 for lining the drying tray aluminium foils 130 mm x 0.03 mm 1000017 for lining the drying tray foil press 1000062 for shaping the aluminium foil Consumables: paper for printer 58 mm 1000234 for integrated printer durable 10 years, according to manufacturer

infrared heater 1000130 sparepart subject to technical modification

a & p instruments e.K. Inh. Peter Ukena Albert-Schweitzer-Straße 16, D-32758 Detmold, Tel. +49 (0)5232 9778-0, Fax +49 (0)5232 9778-20 Internet: apinstruments.de, Email: info@apinstruments.de


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ABB A135-H66 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ABB A135-H66 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: ABB Turbocharging Operation Manual A135-H66 HT594610 English Original Operation Manual Chapter Document-ID 1 Introduction HZTL4005_EN_G 2 Safety HZTL4022_EN_E 3 Safety data sheet HT594610 4 Product description HZTL4030_EN_F Operating limits and replacement intervals The recommended replacement intervals and the corresponding operating limits in chapter 3 are jointly defined with the enginebuilder. This information is specific to the product. Non-observance of the recommended replacement intervals and the operating limits increases the risk of unpre- dictable component failures. Operation Manual / 1 Introduction Table of contents Introduction 1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 2 1.1 Purpose of the manual.................................................................................................. 2 1.2 Symbols, definitions...................................................................................................... 3 1.3 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts...................................................... 5 1.4 Contact information...................................................................................................... 7 © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.1 Purpose of the manual 1 Introduction 1.1 Purpose of the manual © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Fig. 1: Serial number (01) on the rating plate This Operation Manual belongs to the turbocharger with the identical serial number (01), see chapter 3 (Safety data sheet) and the rating plate on the turbocharger. Operation Manual The Operation Manual explains the turbocharger and contains instructions for safe opera- tion. The Operation Manual is a complement to and expansion of existing national regulations for occupational safety, accident prevention and environmental protection. Target group The Operation Manual is aimed at engineers and trained mechanics responsible for the proper operation of the engine and for the turbocharger connected to it. Availability of the Operation Manual The Operation Manual must be available where the turbocharger is used. All persons operating or working on the turbocharger must have read and fully understood the Operation Manual. Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.2 Symbols, definitions 1.2 Symbols, definitions Symbols The following symbols are used in this document: ▶ Indicates an action step. 1. Indicates a numbered action step. → Refers to a page number Definition of Note NOTICE Note The note provides advice which facilitates the work. Definition of mandatory signs Mandatory signs show the protective equipment to be worn for a task. The mandatory signs are described in chapter Safety and must be complied with. Definition of Caution / Warning Caution and warning signs are described in chapter Safety. ABB Turbocharging ABB Switzerland Ltd, Turbocharging is identified as ABB Turbocharging or as ABB Turbo Sys- tems in this document. Official service stations of ABB Turbocharging Official service stations are regularly audited and certified by ABB Turbocharging. See also chapter Contact information →7. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.2 Symbols, definitions Definition of pictograms The following pictograms can occur in this document. These point out actions that must be taken in accordance with the meaning of the relevant pictogram. Pictogram Meaning Dispose of in an environmentally compatible, professional way and in compliance with locally applicable regulations. Table 1: Definition of pictograms © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Affix Measure Note Visually inspect Please note text for numbered work step. See document Tighten with specified torque Tighten over specified tightening angle Hand-tight, tighten without tools Oil Apply screw locking paste (e.g. Loctite) Apply high-temperature grease Apply other paste in accordance with specifications Oil free, grease free and dry Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.3 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts 1.3 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts up to 6 months New turbochargers and spare parts can be stored in sealed packaging without additional mothballing measures for up to 6 months from the date of delivery (marked by the VCI label on the package). © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Fig. 2: Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor (VCI) Only dry rooms in which the relative humidity is between 40...70 % and no condensation can form are suitable for storage. Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts for more than 6 months Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. The following mothballing measures are required every 6 months: ▶ Open the package. ▶ Remove the VCI corrosion protection emitter from the package and replace it with a new, identical VCI corrosion protection emitter. New VCI corrosion protection emitters can be obtained at branopac.com. ▶ Dispose of the old VCI corrosion protection emitter in an environmentally compatible manner, professionally and in accordance with local regulations. ▶ Seal the package. The better the external seal is designed, the more permanent the pro- tection. WARNING Protection of health when handling VCIs VCI products are not hazardous in the sense of the Hazardous Substances Ordinance. Nevertheless, the following points are to be observed when handling VCIs: ▶ Observe specifications in the safety data sheet ▶ Ensure good room ventilation. ▶ Do not eat, drink or keep food at the workplace while working with VCIs. ▶ Clean hands and face after working with VCIs. ▶ For further information refer to branopac.com. Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.3 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts Long-term storage of turbochargers The turbochargers will be prepared for prolonged storage by ABB Turbo Systems on re- quest. The package is equipped with a hygrometer (see illustration). © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Fig. 3: Package with hygrometer The following measures are required every 6 months: ▶ Check the hygrometer (02) in the sight-glass. There is an opening (01) in the wooden crate which allows this check to be carried out. When the display field has changed colour at the 70% level, the maximum permissible humidity has been exceeded. In this case the turbocharger must be inspected by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station and repacked. ▶ Inspect the package for damage. If the package is damaged, the turbocharger must be in- spected by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station and repacked. After every 3 years the following work steps must be performed by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station: ▪ Inspect the components ▪ Replace the desiccant agent ▪ Repackage the components. If the 70% display field of the hygrometer (02) has not changed colour and the package is undamaged, the turbocharger can be placed into operation without any prior testing by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Unpacking turbochargers The corrosion protection effect ends after the material is unpacked from the VCI package. To avoid the formation of condensation, the surroundings and the content of the package must have the same temperature during unpacking. Operation Manual / 1 Introduction 1 Introduction / 1.4 Contact information 1.4 Contact information Contact information for the ABB Turbocharging Service Stations is available online. ▶ Scan the QR code to access our website. ABB Switzerland Ltd, Turbocharging Bruggerstrasse 71a CH-5401 Baden Switzerland abb.com/turbocharging © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4005_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 Table of contents Safety 1 Safety ...................................................................................................................... 2 1.1 Introduction.................................................................................................................... 2 1.2 CE conformity................................................................................................................. 2 1.3 Definition of mandatory signs.................................................................................... 3 1.4 Definition of safety instructions ................................................................................ 3 1.5 Intended use .................................................................................................................. 4 1.6 Deflagration on gas engines ....................................................................................... 5 1.7 Warning plates on the turbocharger......................................................................... 6 1.8 Turbocharger rating plate............................................................................................ 7 1.9 Periodic check of the pressure vessels..................................................................... 8 1.10 Lifting of loads.............................................................................................................. 9 1.11 Prerequisites for operation and maintenance....................................................... 10 1.12 Hazards during operation and maintenance ......................................................... 11 1.13 Safe operation.............................................................................................................. 13 1.14 Safe maintenance ........................................................................................................ 15 © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.1 Introduction 1 Safety 1.1 Introduction Turbochargers manufactured by ABB reflect the state of the art. The respective safety and health protection requirements are met. This ensures safe operation of the turbocharger. Nevertheless, there may be some residual risks during operation of and work on the tur- bocharger which: ▪ Are caused by the turbocharger itself or its accessories. ▪ Are caused by the operating equipment used or supplies and materials. ▪ Are a consequence of insufficient compliance with safety instructions. ▪ Are a consequence of insufficient or inappropriate performance of maintenance and in- spection work. The operating company is responsible for defining measures that regulate safe access to and safe handling of the turbocharger. All instructions contained in this chapter must be observed for safe and trouble-free opera- tion of the turbocharger and during all work on the turbocharger. All further safety instructions contained and specifically identified in every chapter of this manual (Definition of safety instructions →3) must also be observed. 1.2 CE conformity Information ABB turbochargers comply with the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC and are partly com- pleted machinery as defined by Article 2 g in this directive. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.3 Definition of mandatory signs 1.3 Definition of mandatory signs To be worn at all times

Safety footwear to protect against mechanical hazard and risk of falling Table 1: Personal protective equipment to be worn at all times To be worn specific to the respective task Ear protection Safety helmet Protective clothing

Table 2: Personal protective equipment to be worn specific to the respective task 1.4 Definition of safety instructions © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Definition of Warning Non-compliance or inaccurate compliance with working or operating in- structions indicated by this symbol and the word WARNING can lead to seri- ous injuries to personnel and even to fatal accidents. ▶ Warning signs must always be observed. CAUTION Definition of Caution Non-compliance or inaccurate compliance with working or operating in- structions indicated by this symbol and the word CAUTION can lead to seri- ous damage to engine or property with grave consequences. ▶ Caution signs must always be observed.

Safety glasses Safety gloves to protect against - Mechanical hazard - Chemical hazard - Thermal hazard Safety goggles Respiratory mask to protect against - Dusts - Gases

Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.5 Intended use 1.5 Intended use Use on internal combustion engines in general ABB turbochargers are intended for turbocharging internal combustion engines. To ensure compliance with the machinery directive 2006/42/EC when using on gas engines, the turbocharger must be operated in an engine room classified as "not at risk of explosion". This is in accordance with the position paper [2] relating to ATEX issued by EUROMOT [1]. For use on pre-mix gas engines with ignitable propellents in the gas control system, the en- ginebuilder must implement appropriate safety measures for explosion protection [3] (such as flame barriers in the inlet system, for example) to assure that there is no transient pres- sure increase exceeding a maximum of 12 bar before the turbocharger in case of a deflagra- tion. The turbocharger supplies the engine with the air volume or air/gas mixture and the associ- ated charging pressure required for operation. The turbocharger is solely intended to be operated with a clockwise direction of rotation as viewed from the turbine end. The specific operating limits of the turbocharger were determined on the basis of informa- tion from the enginebuilder about the intended use. These data are given on the rating plate. ABB accepts no liability and rejects all warranty claims for any non-intended uses. [1] Euromot = The European Association of Internal Combustion Engine Manufacturers [2] Directive 94/9/EC concerning equipment and protective systems intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (ATEX) The Euromot Position as of November 2003, ATEX Euromot Position 191103 [3] Guidelines for proper safety design of inlet systems on gas engines, RWTÜV Essen, 1991 WARNING Unapproved operation Any operation of the turbocharger outside of its operating limits can be haz- ardous to personnel. ▶ Only operate the turbocharger within the operating limits. ▶ Only trained personnel must operate the turbocharger. The intended use of the turbocharger includes compliance with all regulations and condi- tions. In particular, the following must be observed: ▪ Operation Manual ▪ Instructions of the enginebuilder © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.6 Deflagration on gas engines State of the art The turbocharger is designed and manufactured according to the state of the art and is safe to operate. Perfect condition The turbocharger must only be used when it is in a technically flawless condition and oper- ated in compliance with its intended use. ABB excludes any liability for damage resulting from unauthorized modifications to the tur- bocharger or improper operation. 1.6 Deflagration on gas engines ABB turbochargers can tolerate a deflagration with a transient pressure increase of 12 bar. After a deflagration event ABB Turbo Systems recommends verifying the following points on the turbocharger: ▪ Position of the turbine and compressor casings to the bearing casing ▪ Shifting of the bearing casing in relation to the bracket ▪ Cracks in casings If during external inspection anomalies are found or if a particularly strong deflagration event has taken place, it is also recommended to check the bearings of the turbochargers before the next start. An ABB Turbocharging Service Station should be instructed to carry out this inspection. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.7 Warning plates on the turbocharger 1.7 Warning plates on the turbocharger Warning plates are attached to the turbocharger, which must be observed. The warning plates must always be present in the intended locations and must be legible. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Fig. 1: Warning plate If warning plates are not present in the intended locations or are not legible, they must be replaced with new warning plates. The necessary information can be found in the Operation Manual, Chapter 4 Product description. Turbochargers supplied to the enginebuilder without insulation must be equipped later with warning plates on the insulation. This is the responsibility of the enginebuilder. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.8 Turbocharger rating plate 1.8 Turbocharger rating plate © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Fig. 2: Rating plate Operating limits 01 Turbocharger operating limits at engine overload (110 %). In test rig operation only, unless otherwise agreed with the en- ginebuilder. 02 Turbocharger operating limits during operation Recommended inspection and replacement intervals of turbocharger components 03 Inspection interval of plain bearings in 1000 h 04 Replacement interval of compressor in 1000 h 05 Replacement interval of turbine in 1000 h Further data 06 Customer part number 07 Designation for special design 08 Weight of turbocharger in kg 09 Turbocharger type 10 Serial number 11 Year of construction of turbocharger 12 Manufacturing plant Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.9 Periodic check of the pressure vessels Explanations regarding the rating plate The recommended inspection and replacement intervals and the corresponding operating limits are jointly defined with the enginebuilder. This information is specific to the system. Operation above the indicated values nBmax, tBmax can considerably shorten the recommended replacement intervals. In such a case, we recommend that you contact the nearest official service station of ABB Turbo Systems. nMmax, tMmax normally apply only when running at overload (110 %) during trials on the engine test bed. These limit values can also be permitted during operation for special applications. Operation above nMmax and tMmax is not permitted. Non-observance of the recommended inspection and replacement intervals increases the risk of unpredictable component failures. Locations of the rating plates The locations of the rating plates are defined in the Operation Manual, Chapter 4 Product description. 1.9 Periodic check of the pressure vessels The pressure vessels used by ABB Turbocharging, such as those for wet or dry cleaning, are so-called "simple pressure vessels". ▪ The locally applicable legal regulations regarding periodic checks of the pressure vessels must be observed. ▪ The operating company is responsible for the safe operation of the pressure vessel. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Danger due to pressure vessels The operating company must make sure the pressure vessels are in proper working condition and monitor them. Necessary repair or maintenance work must be performed promptly, and the required safety measures must be taken. ▶ Pressure equipment must not be operated if defects are present. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.10 Lifting of loads 1.10 Lifting of loads © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Fig. 3: Attachment of loads on the crane hook Fig. 4: Attachment angle If there are two or more suspension points, the attachment angle of 45° must not be ex- ceeded. This prevents excessive loading due to diagonal pull. ▶ Before looping around the components of the turbocharger, let them cool down (max- imum 80 °C). ▶ Attach components of the turbocharger as described in the respective action steps. ▶ Use a suitable edge guard if there are sharp edges. ▶ The assembly devices must be completely screwed in and must not unscrew during use. ▶ Use assembly devices only for the described applications. ▶ Put down dismantled components of the turbocharger in such a way that they cannot tip over. WARNING Suspended loads Loads that are not attached according to regulations can cause injury to personnel or fatal accidents. ▶ Loads must always be fastened to properly functional lifting gear with a sufficient load limit. ▶ Pay attention to the correct attachment of loads on the crane hook. ▶ People must not stand beneath suspended loads. Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. Wear safety helmet. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.11 Prerequisites for operation and maintenance 1.11 Prerequisites for operation and maintenance Responsibility of the operating company In awareness of its responsibility, the operating company must ensure that only authorised personnel work on the turbocharger, who: ▪ Are versed in the general and locally applicable regulations for occupational safety and accident prevention ▪ Are equipped with the prescribed personal protective equipment ▪ Have read and understood the Operation Manual ▪ Have been instructed in the use of the turbocharger. The safety-conscious work of the personnel and adherence to the Operation Manual must be checked periodically. Suitable working materials and personal protective equipment must be kept in a perfect condition. Only authorised personnel may remain in the vicinity of the turbocharger when the engine is running. Competence of personnel The turbocharger must only be operated and serviced by trained and authorised personnel. Basic mechanical training is a prerequisite. Modifications to the turbocharger Modifications to the turbocharger must be approved by ABB Turbo Systems. WARNING Use original parts Operation of the turbocharger with non-original parts can impair the safety of the turbocharger and can cause serious damage to property and injury to personnel. ▶ Only use original parts from ABB Turbo Systems. Original parts and accessories are specially designed by ABB Turbo Systems for the ABB tur- bochargers. ABB accepts no liability for any damage resulting from the use of non-original parts and cor- responding accessories. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.12 Hazards during operation and maintenance 1.12 Hazards during operation and maintenance Noise hazards The turbocharger's noise emission during operation is influenced by its installation and op- erating conditions. A noise level exceeding 85 dB(A) is harmful. Wear ear protection. Hazards due to hot surfaces Surfaces of the turbocharger, attached parts and operating fluids (lubricating oil) get hot during operation. The surface temperature depends on the efficacy of the existing insula- tion. The temperature may rise to a level that can cause burns. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Danger due to noise Exposure to noise can harm the hearing system, impair health and the psy- chological state and may lead to lack of attention and irritation. ▶ When the engine is running, always wear ear protection. ▶ Always wear ear protection if the sound pressure level exceeds 85 dB(A). WARNING Danger of burns Touching hot surfaces or contact with hot operating fluids can cause burns. ▶ Do not touch hot surfaces. Observe the warning plate on the turbochar- ger. ▶ Wear heat-resistant safety gloves and protective clothing. ▶ Wait for the turbocharger to cool down before carrying out any work. Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.12 Hazards during operation and maintenance © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. Hazards due to rotating parts Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. Hazards due to electrical installations (if present) WARNING Hot surfaces on the non-insulated turbocharger Non-insulated turbochargers can cause serious injuries to personnel (burns). The turbocharger is supplied with or without insulation in accordance with the purchase order received from the enginebuilder. If supply is without in- sulation, the enginebuilder is responsible for providing the turbocharger with proper insulation and for providing protection against contact with hot surfaces. ▶ Compliance with the instructions and specifications given by the en- ginebuilder to protect against hot turbocharger surfaces is compulsory. WARNING Physical hazards Contact with rotating parts can cause severe injury. The turbocharger must never be used without the filter silencer or the air suction branch. With the engine stopped, the rotor can rotate due to the stack draught alone. ▶ Operate the turbocharger in compliance with the specifications. ▶ Secure the rotor against unintentional rotation during maintenance. WARNING Dangers during work on electrical installations Electrical installations use voltages that can lead to severe injury to person- nel or accidents resulting in fatalities. At the same time, electrical or electronic components and parts can also be damaged or destroyed. ▶ Only specially trained personnel should perform work on, or with, elec- trical components. ▶ Observe national regulations. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.13 Safe operation © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Absence of grounding on electrical installations Missing or incorrectly fitted grounding conductors can lead to severe injury to personnel or accidents resulting in fatalities. Electric shock or elevated electromagnetic disturbances can damage or des- troy electrical and electronic components. ▶ Ground electrical installations properly with grounding conductors. ▶ Check the grounding connections on a regular basis and make sure they are properly connected. ▶ Switch off the power supply before working on any electrical installations. ▶ After switching off the power supply, wait for 5 minutes to allow capacitors to discharge and hot components to cool down. ▶ Ensure the power supply is switched off when working on electrical installations. ▶ Do not carry out any tests with regard to insulation resistance or voltage on the electrical components. 1.13 Safe operation Mechanical hazards during operation During standard operation, no mechanical hazards are caused by the turbocharger itself if it has been properly installed. Safety during commissioning and operation ▶ Visually inspect your working environment before starting work. ▶ Remove any obstacles and objects littering the workplace. ▶ Check all pipes to and from the turbocharger for damage and leaks before commission- ing. ▶ Check turbocharger for recognisable damage or defects every 12 hours of operation or at least once a day. ▶ Report any damage and any alterations of operational characteristics to the responsible department immediately. ▶ In case of damage, take the turbocharger out of operation immediately and safeguard against accidental/unauthorised use. ▶ When switching on operating energy supplies (hydraulics, pneumatics, electricity), pay at- tention to the risks that may occur as a consequence of this energy input. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.13 Safe operation © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Fig. 5 Variant A Insulation (01) with integrated burst protection from ABB Turbo Systems. Variant B Burst protection (03) and insulation (02) from ABB Turbo Systems. Variant C Burst protection (03) from ABB Turbo Systems with appropriate insulation from the enginebuilder. WARNING Burst protection and insulation Operation without burst protection and insulation or with the wrong com- bination of burst protection and insulation can cause serious injuries to per- sons or even fatal accidents. ▶ Only operate the turbocharger with burst protection fitted and insulation fitted in one of the following, permitted variants. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.14 Safe maintenance 1.14 Safe maintenance Occupational safety WARNING Risk of falling When working on the turbocharger, there is a risk of falling. ▶ Do not climb onto the turbocharger or onto attached parts and do not use them as climbing aids. ▶ Use suitable climbing aids and working platforms for work above body height. ▶ Comply with the general accident prevention regulations. ▶ Only perform work on the turbocharger when you are in a physically and psychologically stable condition. ▶ Only work with suitable tools, equipment and appliances that function properly. ▶ Power tools must be grounded and cables must be undamaged. ▶ Keep the workplace clean; clear away any loose objects and obstacles on the floor. ▶ Keep the floor, equipment, and turbocharger clean. ▶ Have oil binding agents ready and provide or keep oil pans at hand. ▶ Clean up any spills. ▶ Have fire protection means and extinguishing agents available. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Injuries to persons Severe injuries to personnel or fatal accidents can be caused by mechanical influences as a consequence of hazardous and inadequate operational pro- cedures or non-compliance with safety and health standards. ▶ When working on the turbocharger always wear safety footwear and pro- tective clothing to protect against mechanical hazards. ▶ Keep personal protective equipment in perfect condition. ▶ Obey mandatory signs. ▶ Observe the general rules for occupational safety and prevention of acci- dents. ▶ Only perform operations that are described in this manual. ▶ Only perform operations for which you have received instruction or train- ing. Wear safety footwear to protect against mechanical hazard and risk of fall- ing. Wear protective clothing. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.14 Safe maintenance Welding work in the vicinity of the turbocharger ▶ When performing welding work in the vicinity of the turbocharger, always cover the filter silencer to prevent the filter mat from being damaged. ▶ Keep flammable objects and substances out of the vicinity of flying sparks. ▶ Cover all connections on the turbocharger so that no foreign objects can enter the tur- bocharger. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) for welding operations. Safety during cleaning If cleaning agents or solvents are used for cleaning, the corresponding material safety data sheet and the safety instructions in section Hazards due to operating materials and supplies must be observed. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet for the cleaning agent or solvent. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Inspect the electric cables for abrasion and damage before and after your cleaning work. Safety during disassembly, assembly, maintenance and repair ▶ Observe the procedures for set-up, service and inspection work and the inspection inter- vals. ▶ Inform the operating staff before starting any service or repair work. Make sure the en- gine is not started while work is being conducted on the turbocharger. ▶ Before taking off any cover or removing any guard from the turbocharger, switch off the engine and wait until the turbocharger has come to a standstill. ▶ Make sure that the oil supply is interrupted, especially with an external oil supply. ▶ Only restart the engine after all parts have been properly fitted again and oil supply is en- sured. CAUTION Mechanical operations on the turbocharger Components of the turbocharger can be damaged or destroyed as a result of improper procedures. ▶ Only perform operations that are described in this manual. ▶ Only perform operations for which you have received instruction or train- ing. Safety when taking out of operation or preparing for mothballing ▶ Secure rotor against turning. The rotor can rotate due to the stack draught alone. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet for the cleaning and mothballing agents. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.14 Safe maintenance Mechanical hazards when working on the turbocharger WARNING Mechanical hazards Severe injuries to personnel or fatal accidents can be caused by mechanical influences as a consequence of hazardous and inadequate operational pro- cedures. ▶ Observe the general rules for occupational safety and prevention of acci- dents. ▶ Ensure workplace safety. ▶ Only perform operations that are described in this chapter. ▶ Only perform operations for which you have previously received instruc- tion or training. Hazards due to operating materials and supplies Operating materials and supplies are substances required for the operation of the tur- bocharger or for the performance of maintenance work. Oils, greases, coolants, detergents and solvents, acids and similar substances can be classified as hazardous substances. © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 WARNING Physical hazards due to rotating parts The rotor can rotate due to the stack draught alone. Contact with rotating parts can cause severe injury. ▶ Secure rotor against turning. WARNING Handling operating materials and supplies Swallowing or inhaling vapours of operating materials and supplies or con- tact with them may be harmful to health. ▶ Do not breathe in these substances and avoid contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure proper ventilation. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the operat- ing materials and supplies. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. Operation Manual / 2 Safety / A130 - A155 1 Safety / 1.14 Safe maintenance © Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4022_EN Revision E May 2017 CAUTION Environmental hazard Improper handling of operating materials and supplies can lead to environ- mental damage. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the operat- ing materials and supplies. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Hazards due to the handling of insulation materials WARNING Danger of fire or explosion Flammable and combustible operating materials and supplies can catch fire or resulting vapours can lead to an explosion. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the operat- ing materials and supplies. ▶ Comply with local legislation. ▶ Do not allow any exposed flame or ignition source during cleaning work. ▶ Carry out cleaning in the open or provide sufficient ventilation. WARNING Danger from insulation materials Dust or fibres from insulation materials can have adverse effects on the health or cause irritations. Unsuitable and combustible insulation materials are a fire hazard. ▶ Only use suitable and non-combustible insulation materials. ▶ Ensure good ventilation at the workplace. ▶ Avoid whirling up dust. ▶ Use dust-free tools and working methods. ▶ Remove package at the workplace only. ▶ Proceed with particular care when removing old insulation materials. ▶ Dispose of insulation materials properly and in an environmentally com- patible manner in compliance with the legal regulations. Wear safety goggles. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against dusts. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Operation Manual / A135-H66 / Safety data sheet Page 1 / 1 Safety data sheet A135-H66 HT594610 © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HT594610 May 2020 A135-H66 HT594610 864 680 844 650 X00067234 270 16 50 50 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H Table of contents Product description 1 Introduction............................................................................................................ 3 1.1 Essential information.................................................................................................... 3 1.2 Registered trademarks................................................................................................. 3 1.3 Related documents........................................................................................................ 3 1.4 Layout and function of the turbocharger................................................................ 4 1.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger......................................................................... 6 1.6 Locations of the rating plates..................................................................................... 7 2 Removing and Installing........................................................................................ 8 2.1 Weight and transportation of the turbocharger.................................................... 8 2.2 Removing the turbocharger........................................................................................ 9 2.3 Installing the turbocharger........................................................................................ 13 3 Commissioning .................................................................................................... 20 3.1 Oil supply...................................................................................................................... 20 3.2 Inspection procedures................................................................................................ 22 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation...................................................... 24 4 Monitoring operation.......................................................................................... 25 4.1 Oil pressure, oil temperature.................................................................................... 25 4.2 Exhaust gas temperature before turbine ............................................................... 27 4.3 Turbocharger speed................................................................................................... 28 5 Operation and service......................................................................................... 31 5.1 Noise emission............................................................................................................. 31 5.2 Service work................................................................................................................. 33 5.3 Expected replacement intervals ............................................................................... 37 5.4 Stopping the engine................................................................................................... 39 6 Periodic maintenance work................................................................................ 40 6.1 Foreword to maintenance......................................................................................... 40 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically ........................................................................ 41 7 Eliminating malfunctions.................................................................................... 51 7.1 Malfunctions when starting....................................................................................... 51 7.2 Malfunctions during operation................................................................................ 52 7.3 Turbocharger is surging............................................................................................ 55 7.4 Malfunctions when stopping.................................................................................... 56 7.5 Speed measurement system..................................................................................... 57 8 Dismantling and fitting....................................................................................... 58 8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................. 58 © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H Table of contents 8.2 Weights of individual parts....................................................................................... 60 8.3 Removing the air inlets.............................................................................................. 62 8.4 Removing the gas outlet casing .............................................................................. 63 8.5 Removing the gas outlet flange............................................................................... 63 8.6 Removing the compressor casing........................................................................... 66 8.7 Pressing off the casing.............................................................................................. 68 8.8 Removing the cartridge group................................................................................. 69 8.9 Removing the nozzle ring........................................................................................... 71 8.10 Installing the cartridge group on the service support......................................... 72 8.11 Measuring clearance A and B..................................................................................... 73 8.12 Nozzle ring compression PD..................................................................................... 74 8.13 Installing the nozzle ring ............................................................................................ 75 8.14 Installing the cartridge group .................................................................................. 76 8.15 Installing the compressor casing ............................................................................ 78 8.16 Measuring radial clearances N and R ...................................................................... 80 8.17 Installing the air inlets ................................................................................................ 81 8.18 Installing the gas outlet flange ................................................................................ 82 8.19 Installing the gas outlet casing................................................................................ 82 8.20 Table of tightening torques...................................................................................... 83 9 Taking out of operation at short notice........................................................... 84 9.1 Possible emergency repairs...................................................................................... 84 9.2 Installing the replacement turbocharger............................................................... 85 9.3 Installing the replacement cartridge group .......................................................... 85 10 Mothballing the turbocharger............................................................................ 86 10.1 Taking the engine out of operation for up to 12 months ................................... 86 10.2 Taking the engine out of operation for more than 12 months.......................... 87 11 Disposing of turbocharger components .......................................................... 88 12 Spare parts ........................................................................................................... 89 12.1 Ordering spare parts.................................................................................................. 89 12.2 Required customer spare part set (97070)............................................................ 89 12.3 View of turbocharger with part numbers.............................................................. 90 Figures................................................................................................................... 92 Tables .................................................................................................................... 93 © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 1 Introduction / 1.1 Essential information 1 Introduction 1.1 Essential information Design variants This document is valid for different design variants of turbochargers. There may be sections and descriptions of components that are not relevant for a specific turbocharger variant. Please contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station if you have any questions regarding a design variant (see Contact information at abb.com/turbocharging). Accuracy of illustrations The illustrations in this document are general in nature and intended for ease of understand- ing. Differences in detail are therefore possible. 1.2 Registered trademarks The trademarks of outside companies are used in this document. These are marked with the ® symbol. 1.3 Related documents Chapter Document number Operation Manual / 1 Introduction HZTL4005 Operation Manual / 2 Safety HZTL4022 Operation Manual / 3 Safety data sheet *) Serial number of the turbocharger Table 1: Related documents *) This chapter is only available in serialised operation manuals. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 1 Introduction / 1.4 Layout and function of the turbocharger 1.4 Layout and function of the turbocharger © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 1: Layout and function of the turbocharger 01 Air suction branch 08 Gas outlet flange 02 Compressor casing 09 Nozzle ring 03 Diffuser 10 Turbine casing 04 Bearing casing 11 Turbine-end bearing flange 05 Axial thrust bearing 12 Compressor-end bearing flange 06 Radial plain bearing 13 Compressor wheel 07 Turbine Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 1 Introduction / 1.4 Layout and function of the turbocharger Mode of operation The turbocharger is a turbomachine and consists of the following main components: ▪ Turbine ▪ Compressor. The exhaust gases of the internal combustion engine flow through the turbine casing (10) and the nozzle ring (09) onto the turbine (07). The turbine (07) uses the energy contained in the exhaust gas to drive the rotor and, hence, the compressor wheel (13). The exhaust gases then reach the atmosphere through the exhaust gas pipe connected to the gas outlet flange (08). The compressor wheel (13) sucks in fresh air through the air suction branch (01). In the com- pressor wheel (13), the energy required for building up the pressure is transferred to the air. By flowing through the diffuser (03) and the compressor casing (02), the air is compressed further and is then directed to the engine cylinders. The rotor runs in two radial plain bearings (06) which are located in the bearing casing (04) between compressor and turbine. The axial thrust bearing (05) is located between the two radial plain bearings. The plain bearings are connected to a central lubricating oil duct which is normally supplied by the lubricating oil circuit of the engine. The oil outlet always lies at the deepest point of the bearing casing (04). 1.4.1 Function of the compressor wheel cooling © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 2: Compressor wheel cooling Depending on the application of an A100 radial turbocharger, the turbocharger is equipped with compressor wheel cooling. With compressor wheel cooling, after the compressor air has cooled down by passing through the charge air cooler on the engine side, it is supplied to the turbocharger for cooling the compressor wheel. Cooling of the compressor wheel is compulsory to ensure the reliability and replacement intervals for the relevant operating conditions. In the turbocharger version with compressor wheel cooling, the cooling air is supplied through a lateral connection in the bearing casing (X). In addition, the turbocharger version with compressor wheel cooling is indicated by the tur- bocharger type (H6..) on the rating plate. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 1 Introduction / 1.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger 1.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger Warning plates are affixed at the following locations: © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 3: Warning plate locations If warning plates are not present in the designated locations or not readable, proceed as fol- lows: ▶ Order new warning plates from ABB Turbocharging Service Stations. ▶ Remove any warning plates that have become unreadable. ▶ Clean and degrease the areas designated for the warning plates. ▶ Fit new warning plates and remove protective sheets. Turbochargers supplied to the enginebuilder without insulation must be equipped later with warning plates on the insulation. This is the responsibility of the enginebuilder. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 1 Introduction / 1.6 Locations of the rating plates 1.6 Locations of the rating plates © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 4: Locations of the rating plates One rating plate (01) each is attached on the left and the right side of the turbocharger bear- ing casing. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.1 Weight and transportation of the tur- bocharger 2 Removing and Installing 2.1 Weight and transportation of the turbocharger Lifting gear with a sufficient load limit must be used for removing, installing and transport- ing the turbocharger. The weight specified below applies to the heaviest variant possible. Depending on the specification, the weight specified on the rating plate may be lower than the standard value specified here. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 5: Transportation of the turbocharger Product Weight of complete turbocharger unit [kg] A130-H 190 A135-H 270 A140-H 460 Table 2: Weight of complete turbocharger unit Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.2 Removing the turbocharger 2.2 Removing the turbocharger ▶ Disconnect all pipes according to the instructions of the enginebuilder. ▶ If present: Loosen and remove the compressor wheel cooling connection. Seal the compressor wheel cooling connection (01). © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 6: Removing the turbocharger A Position of expansion sleeves B Clamping nut C Standard nut ▶ Apply penetrating oil to thread of stud (02) and nut and let it work in. Do not apply penetrating oil to the pressure screws of the clamping nut (B). ▶ If present: Disconnect the plug to the speed sensor (86505) and secure the rolled-up cable on the turbocharger. This protects the plug from being crushed. ▶ If present: Detach the support (61301) from the engine support. Depending on the bracket version (04), positioning pins (05) can be used for positioning and safeguarding against wrong fitting of the turbocharger. Therefore the turbocharger must al- ways be removed from and installed on the bracket vertically. The gas outlet casing (61001) can remain fitted in the exhaust gas pipe if the locking nuts are accessible. Otherwise the complete turbocharger unit including gas outlet casing must be removed. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.2 Removing the turbocharger 2.2.1 Fastening of the turbocharger CAUTION Freezing of the cooling water in the bearing casing Serious damage to property can be the consequence if the cooling water freezes in the pipes and in the bearing casing. ▶ For transport and storage of the turbocharger, drain the cooling water in the bearing casing via two openings of the water connections. Manual loosening To remove the turbocharger from the bracket, proceed as follows: ▶ Loosen and remove water connections. Close the openings of the water connections with screw plugs. ▶ Attach lifting gear to the suspension eye. ▶ Loosen and remove nuts (C). Hydraulic loosening (round special nut) If the turbocharger was fitted by the enginebuilder using a hydraulic tool, disassembly is also done using a hydraulic tool (see instructions of the enginebuilder). When doing this, proceed as follows: ▶ Attach lifting gear to the suspension eye. ▶ Remove the turbocharger. ▶ Cover the oil connections (03) at the engine side to protect against contamination. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 WARNING Risk of scalding from hot water If the water connections are removed immediately after taking the tur- bocharger out of operation, the hot cooling water that flows out can cause scalding if it comes into contact with the skin. ▶ Allow turbocharger to cool down before removing the water pipes. ▶ Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.2 Removing the turbocharger 2.2.2 Loosening the clamping nut CAUTION Do not clean pressure screws The pressure screws are equipped with a permanent sliding layer that must not be removed. In case of non-compliance, it cannot be ensured that the necessary tension force is reached. ▶ Do not clean pressure screws. ▶ Do not lubricate pressure screws. If a screw jams, the previously loosened screw must be tightened again a little. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 7: Loosening the clamping nut 1. Working in a circle, break loose each pressure screw (≤ 20°). 2. Working in a circle, loosen each pressure screw by 45° in 4 rounds. 3. Working in a circle, loosen each pressure screw by 90° in 1...5 rounds until all of the pres- sure screws have been relieved. ▶ Loosen clamping nut by hand. CAUTION Incorrect procedure can make loosening impossible If individual pressure screws are fully relieved, the pressure screws can be- come compressed, making it impossible to loosen them. ▶ Comply with the following steps for loosening the pressure screws. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.2 Removing the turbocharger 2.2.3 Putting down the turbocharger © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 8: Putting down the turbocharger ▶ Remove turbocharger from engine support, set it down properly in an appropriate place and secure it. ▶ Close or cover the openings of the turbocharger and support. WARNING Risk of tipping If the turbocharger is not positioned stably, it may tip over. This can result in serious personal injury. ▶ Place the turbocharger on a clean, level support. ▶ Secure the turbocharger to prevent it from tipping over by using wooden beams and wedges and by taking the centre of gravity into account. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.1 Inserting gaskets into the bracket CAUTION Inserting the gaskets Gaskets that are forgotten, damaged or improperly inserted will lead to oil leaks. ▶ Always use new gaskets and insert them carefully into the slot. The oil is supplied (02) and drained (03) through the bracket (01). The necessary sealing is provided by O-rings. The O-rings are not included in the ABB Turbo Systems scope of delivery. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 9: Inserting gaskets into the bracket 01 Bracket 04 Slot for O-ring 02 Oil supply 05 O-rings 03 Oil drain 06 Pin (optional) Pin (06) as installation safety device Turbochargers can have an oil inlet either on their right or left side; the oil inlet position can be different for the turbocharger fitted on the left and on the right engine bank. A pin can be installed in every support as an installation safety device to prevent inadvertent incorrect fitting. This pin fits into the respective slot on the foot of the bearing casing. In- structions of the enginebuilder must be observed. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.2 Fitting threaded rods © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 10: Fitting threaded rods onto the bracket 1. Lightly oil the surfaces of the threaded rods (02) to be screwed in. 2. Screw the threaded rods into the bracket with the aid of locknuts (01). 3. Remove nuts (01) again. Requirements for the threaded rods Fig. 11: Requirements for threaded rods Product Diameter Threaded rod [mm] Material Thread length DIN / ISO 898 L1 [mm] (Part 1) Length of threaded rod L2 [mm] A130-H Ø 16 / M16 10.9 / 12.9 ≥ 30 250 A135-H Ø 20 / M20 10.9 / 12.9 ≥ 30 325 A140-H Ø 24 / M24 10.9 / 12.9 ≥ 70 410 ... 420 Table 3: Requirements for threaded rods Fastening material, scope of delivery The threaded rods and nuts for fastening the turbocharger on the bracket are not included in the ABB Turbo Systems scope of delivery. The clamping nuts are included in the ABB Turbo Systems scope of delivery. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.3 Placing the turbocharger on the bracket © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 12: Placing the turbocharger on the bracket B Clamping nut C Standard nut ▶ Make sure that covers of the oil and water connections are removed. 1. Make sure that the O-rings (03) are undamaged and positioned correctly in the slots. 2. Clean the expansion bushes (42190) and the contact surfaces of the expansion bushes in the bearing casing. 3. Attach the lifting gear to the suspension eye of the bearing casing (42001) and loop around the gas outlet casing. 4. Position the turbocharger on the bracket (04) and align it. If present, pay attention to the positioning pin (05) in the bracket. 5. When fixing with a standard nut (C), fit the expansion bushes in the correct position in the slot. Safeguard against wrong fitting (only for water-cooled bearing casings) Depending on the bracket version (04), two positioning pins (05) can be used for positioning and safeguarding against wrong fitting of the turbocharger. Therefore the turbocharger must always be removed from and installed on the bracket vertically. ▶ Observe the instructions for the fastening variant at hand. ▪ Fastening the turbocharger with a standard nut →16 (A130 - A140) ▪ Fastening the turbocharger with a clamping nut →17 (only A140) Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.4 Fastening the turbocharger with a standard nut ▶ Fit the nuts and tighten them according to variant 1 or 2 in the table below. Product Through hole in bearing casing [mm] Fixing screws [mm] Variant 1: Tightening torques [Nm] **) Variant 2: Hy- draulic pre-ten- sioning forces [kN] A130 Ø 17 M16 280 110 A135 Ø 21 M20 560 175 A140 Ø 25 M24 960 250 Table 4: Tightening torque for standard nuts **) When the turbocharger is mounted on the engine support, the bolt threads and screw heads must be lightly oiled (assumed friction coefficient μ = 0.12 for tightening torque) ▶ Remove the lifting gear. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.5 Fastening the turbocharger with a clamping nut Preparation for tightening CAUTION Do not clean pressure screws (04) The pressure screws are equipped with a permanent sliding layer that must not be removed. Do neither clean nor lubricate the pressure screws. In case of non-compli- ance, it cannot be ensured that the necessary tension force is reached. ▶ Do not clean pressure screws. ▶ Do not lubricate pressure screws. In order to correctly fit the clamping nuts, the pressure screws (04) must not protrude from the clamping nuts (03) in the direction of the thrust washer (02). ▶ Make sure the pressure screws do not protrude in the direction of the thrust washer. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 13: Preparing the clamping nut for the tightening procedure 1. Check whether the expansion bushes (42190) with recess are correctly positioned and do not touch the flange of the core hole cover (A). 2. Clean the thread of the bolt (01) and the contact surface. 3. Lightly oil the bolt thread. 4. Position the thrust washer (02) in place. 5. Tighten clamping nut (03) by hand. 6. Unscrew clamping nut (03) by 1⁄4 of a turn (90°). The distance between the thrust washer and the clamping nut is now about 1 mm. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger Tightening pressure screws © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 14: Tightening pressure screws Product Fixing screw [mm] Tightening torques [Nm] A140 M24 35 Table 5: Torque-controlled tightening of the pressure screws 1. Screw in pressure screws crosswise by hand until reaching the stop. 2. Tighten pressure screws crosswise to 50 % of the tightening torque specified in the table. 3. Tighten pressure screws crosswise to 100 % of the tightening torque specified in the table. 4. Work in a circle to tighten all pressure screws to 100 % of the tightening torque specified in the table. 5. Tighten pressure screws to 100 % in 5 ... 7 rounds until the required residual tightening angle of < 20° is achieved. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 2 Removing and Installing / 2.3 Installing the turbocharger 2.3.6 Connecting the turbocharger ▶ Connect the cable to the speed sensor (86515). ▶ Connect all exhaust gas, water and air lines according to the instructions of the engineb- uilder. Version with compressor wheel cooling © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 15: Connecting the compressor cooling air intake ▶ Remove the screw plug on the connection for the compressor wheel cooling (06) and fit the cooling air line. 2.3.7 Attaching the support Fig. 16: Attaching the support ▶ If present: Attach support (61301) to engine support or to a connecting piece. CAUTION Failure of compressor wheel cooling Any prolonged failure of the compressor wheel cooling will shorten the re- placement interval of the compressor wheel. ▶ Make sure there is an uninterrupted supply of cooling air during opera- tion. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 3 Commissioning / 3.1 Oil supply 3 Commissioning 3.1 Oil supply 3.1.1 Introduction In all operating states, a functioning and carefully executed oil supply is an important pre- requisite for trouble-free operation of the turbocharger. The lubrication of the turbocharger is usually carried out with oil from the engine oil circula- tion. ▶ Comply with the enginebuilder's specifications regarding the selection of lubricating oil and the oil change intervals. 3.1.2 Oil filtering Filtering the lubricating oil with a filter mesh width of ≤ 0.034 mm is sufficient for this tur- bocharger. 3.1.3 Oil pressure Comply precisely with the oil pressure before the turbocharger for trouble-free operation. Different oil pressures must be taken into account here for different operating states, such as, for example, idling mode and when the engine is started. The admissible values are specified in chapter Monitoring operation →25. 3.1.4 Starting the engine for the first time after a turbocharger or engine overhaul When starting the engine for the first time after a turbocharger or engine overhaul, proceed as follows: ▶ Switch on the pre-lubrication pump. ▶ Build up oil pressure (see Table 6: Lubricating oil pressure at oil inlet before turbocharger →25). ▶ Do not exceed a pre-lubrication time of 2 minutes. ▶ Start the engine. ▶ Let the pre-lubrication pump run until the pump driven by the engine generates sufficient pressure. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 3 Commissioning / 3.1 Oil supply 3.1.5 Oil orifice in the bearing casing © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 17: Oil orifice 01 Bearing casing 02 Oil orifice 03 Circlip With an oil inlet pressure of more than 3 bar of overpressure (with engine under load) up- stream of the turbocharger, an oil orifice must be installed to reduce the oil pressure. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 3 Commissioning / 3.2 Inspection procedures 3.2 Inspection procedures 3.2.1 Introduction Inspection procedures include preventative visual controls, monitoring and measuring work before and during commissioning. Inspection procedures enable changes to the turbochar- ger to be detected. Machine damage can be prevented. 3.2.2 Checks before commissioning Filter mat (if available) ▶ Check for damage and contamination. Lubricating system CAUTION Contaminated oil Serious damage to engine or property can be caused by dirt and solid ma- terial particles in the oil. ▶ For the initial commissioning phase and after all service work, flush the complete lubricating system with warm oil. ▶ Use special running-in filters when running in the engine and after all ser- vice work on the lubricating system. ▶ Check that the oil filter is clean before commissioning. ▶ Check the oil pressure in the oil supply pipes. Warning plates ▶ Check whether warning plates are present and legible. ▶ Check whether the protective sheets have been removed from new warning plates. Version with compressor wheel cooling CAUTION Failure of compressor wheel cooling Any prolonged failure of the compressor wheel cooling will shorten the re- placement interval of the compressor wheel. ▶ Make sure there is an uninterrupted supply of cooling air during opera- tion. ▶ Check whether the compressor wheel cooling is fitted on the bearing casing. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 3 Commissioning / 3.2 Inspection procedures Water-cooled bearing casing CAUTION Failure of bearing casing cooling Any prolonged failure of the water cooling will shorten the lifetime of the turbocharger. ▶ Make sure that an uninterrupted supply of cooling water is provided dur- ing operation. ▶ Check whether water pipes are fitted on the bearing casing. 3.2.3 Checks after commissioning (engine in idle mode) Lubricating system ▶ Keep to the lubricating oil pressure at the inlet. ▶ Keep to the lubricating oil temperature at the inlet. ▶ Refer to chapter Monitoring operation →25 for admissible values. Leaktightness of pipes Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. 3.2.4 Checks when starting up the engine If present: ▶ Measure speed, oil pressure and charging pressure at various engine performances. ▶ Measure the exhaust gas temperature before and after the turbine. ▶ Measure the air temperature before and after the compressor. ▶ Compare the measured values with the values of the acceptance report. Different operat- ing conditions indicate a malfunction (see chapter Eliminating malfunctions →51). Lubricants and pastes used during assembly can liquefy or vaporise and escape as oily fluids during the initial hours of operation. Continual escape of an oily fluid indicates an oil leak. If there is a leak, contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 WARNING Risk of burning from hot gas Escaping gases are hot and will lead to serious burns in the event of contact. ▶ Check all pipes for leaks in accordance with the enginebuilder’s instruc- tions. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 3 Commissioning / 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation If present ▶ Remove cover plates (blind flanges) from the compressor casing, the gas inlet and the gas outlet. ▶ Remove the screw plugs on the water connections and fit the water pipe. Version with compressor wheel cooling: ▶ Remove the screw plug on the cooling air connection and fit the cooling air line. General ▶ Check the exhaust gas pipe before and after the turbine for combustion residues or wa- ter residues and clean it. Remove any foreign objects that may be present. ▶ Check and clean filter silencer or air supply line, and remove any foreign objects that may be present. ▶ Put engine-side oil circulation to the turbocharger into operation. ▶ Prepare the turbocharger for operation (see Checks before commissioning →22). ▶ The turbocharger is now ready for operation. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.1 Oil pressure, oil temperature 4 Monitoring operation 4.1 Oil pressure, oil temperature Lubricating oil pressure, oil inlet To limit the oil flow rate through the turbocharger to the admissible values with the engine at full load, an oil orifice is mandatory or already fitted at the turbocharger oil inlet if the oil inlet pressure is > 3 bar. CAUTION Assuring lubricating oil pressure Serious damage to the engine or property can result from a missing or insuf- ficient lubricating oil supply. ▶ The lubricating oil pressure must be monitored during operation and the necessary pressure assured at the oil inlet. Status for operation Pressure at oil inlet upstream of the turbocharger [bar] Overpressure Normal operation 2.0 < poil ≤ 4.5 Engine start: Cold oil, admissible for a maximum of 15 minutes < 8.0 Engine idling, admissible for a maximum of 1 hour 0.5 < poil ≤ 2.5 Pre-lubrication and post-lubrication (engine stopped) 0.5 < poil ≤ 1.0 Warning signal: (n ≥ 0.5 x nBmax) < 1.25 Alarm signal: Not admissible. Stop the engine immedi- ately. < 0.5 Table 6: Lubricating oil pressure at oil inlet before turbocharger 01 Turbocharger contact surface 02 Oil inlet 03 Oil outlet P Oil pressure measuring point T Oil temperature measuring point For monitoring the lubricating oil pressure, ABB Turbo Systems recommends installing a "P" manometer immediately upstream of the turbocharger oil inlet before the orifice. If the pressure is controlled electronically, the relevant signals should be triggered at the warning and alarm values. *) If the drain pipe is vented, the lubricating oil temperature measuring point can be installed at the outlet in the vent tank. Otherwise the measurement should be taken in the drain pipe as close to the turbocharger as possible. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.1 Oil pressure, oil temperature Lubricating oil temperature at the inlet CAUTION Machine damage If the oil temperature at the oil inlet exceeds the admissible range, this may lead to engine damage. ▶ Observe oil temperature at the oil inlet according to the following table. Status for operation Oil temperature at the inlet Toil,inlet Admissible 30 ... 105 °C Temporarily admissible (< 1 h) → alarm > 105 °C Not admissible → stop engine > 110 °C Not admissible → do not start engine (before start: preheat oil) < 30 °C Table 7: Lubricating oil temperature at the inlet Lubricating oil temperature at the outlet The oil temperature at the outlet is mainly dependant on: ▪ Lubricating oil temperature and pressure at the oil inlet ▪ Engine load and turbocharger speed ▪ Exhaust gas temperature The maximum admissible oil temperature at the outlet is listed in the following table. The specified oil outlet temperature is to be considered as alarm value for the turbocharger op- eration and must be monitored according to the current regulations. Status for operation Oil temperature at the outlet Toil,outlet Admissible ≤ 160 °C Temporarily admissible (< 0.5 h) → alarm > 160 °C Not admissible → stop engine > 180 °C Admissible ≤ Toil,inlet + 55 K Temporarily admissible → alarm > Toil,inlet + 55 K Table 8: Lubricating oil temperature at the outlet If the turbocharger was operated for a longer period of time outside of the admissible range, ABB Turbo Systems recommends to have the turbocharger inspected by an ABB Tur- bocharging Service Station. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.2 Exhaust gas temperature before turbine 4.2 Exhaust gas temperature before turbine CAUTION Factors influencing replacement intervals Operation above the operating limits defined on the rating plate can shorten the recommended replacement intervals considerably. ▶ Measure exhaust gas temperature upstream of turbine. ▶ Comply with operating limits on rating plate. ▶ Definition and explanations concerning rating plate: refer to chapter 2 of Operation Manual / Safety. ▶ Operating limits: refer to chapter 3 of Operation Manual / Safety data sheet or examine rating plate. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.3 Turbocharger speed 4.3 Turbocharger speed 4.3.1 Introduction A speed measuring system enables the constant monitoring of the turbocharger speed. CAUTION Do not put the speed measurement cables under strain by pulling them If you pull the speed measurement cables too hard, contacts can be pulled out. ▶ Do not strain the speed measurement cables by pulling. 4.3.2 Layout and overview © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 18: Layout and overview of speed measurement system 86505 Speed sensor 42188 Screw plug 86515 Cable connector 42189 Gasket 86526 F/I converter 01 Plug with integrated voltage limiter 86528 Tachometer *) Installation variant for speed sensor 32109 Sealing disc with cams Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.3 Turbocharger speed 4.3.3 Speed differences with several turbochargers per engine The speeds of all turbochargers on an engine vary only slightly from each other in standard operation. The difference between the highest and the lowest turbocharger speed must not be more than 3 %, relative to the speed limit nBmax. If this permissible range of difference is exceeded, the following steps must be carried out: ▶ Reduce the engine performance immediately to the point at which the maximum tur- bocharger speed does not exceed 70 % of nBmax. ▶ If the engine cannot be stopped, it can continue to be driven at this reduced engine load or turbocharger speed. ▶ If a turbocharger surges continuously, the engine performance must be reduced further. ▶ Measure the temperatures in the air lines and gas piping from and to the turbochargers and compare with normal values. If clear deviations of temperature are found, the nearest ABB Turbocharging Service Station has to be contacted. ▶ Check the pressure loss of the alternative air inlet and compare it with normal values. If the engine can be stopped temporarily: ▶ Inspect air lines, gas piping and the turbochargers and remedy any malfunctions. ▶ In any case, contacting the nearest ABB Turbocharging Service Station is recommended. 4.3.4 Malfunctions on the speed measurement system In the case of malfunctions of the speed measurement system, refer to the chapter entitled Troubleshooting/Speed measurement system →57. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 4 Monitoring operation / 4.3 Turbocharger speed 4.3.5 Replacing the speed sensor Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. The speed sensor supplied by ABB is equipped with a sealing lip and an O-ring. No additional gasket is required during assembly. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 19: Replacing the speed sensor Product Part number Tightening torque A130 86505 M12 x 1.5 15 Nm A135 86505 M12 x 1.5 15 Nm A140 86505 M12 x 1.5 15 Nm Table 9: Tightening torque (86505) ▶ Reduce the engine performance to idling and then stop the engine. Pay attention to post- lubrication (Stopping the engine →39). ▶ Switch off the lubricating oil supply to the turbocharger. ▶ Disconnect cable connector (86515) from speed sensor (86505). ▶ Unscrew and remove defective speed sensor (86505). ▶ Screw in new speed sensor (86505) as far as it will go and tighten. ▶ Connect cable connector (86515) to speed sensor (86505). ▶ Switch on lubricating oil supply to the turbocharger. WARNING Hot speed sensor Danger of burns. The speed sensor can reach temperatures of more than 100 °C during operation. ▶ Wear safety gloves when disassembling the speed sensor. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.1 Noise emission 5 Operation and service 5.1 Noise emission Wear ear protection. The emission sound pressure level (A-weighted) is measured at a distance of 1 meter from the turbocharger. The highest value of the emission sound pressure level1) reaches a maximum of 105 dB(A) near the air inlet. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled with regard to the turbochar- ger to observe this limit value: ▪ Air-inlet system has been fitted ▪ All standard, noise-reducing measures2) have been fitted ▪ Bellows at the air outlet has been acoustically insulated by the enginebuilder (see Fig. 20: Noise insulation, bellows →32). The enginebuilder is responsible for insulating the charge air/scavenging air line and the charge air cooler. 1) Directive 2006/42/EC, 1.7.4.2 / u / Paragraphs 5 + 7 : A-weighted emission sound pressure level 2) The enginebuilder must provide acoustically equivalent measures in case of deviating in- sulation versions © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 WARNING Noise hazards Exposure to noise can harm the hearing system, impair health and the psy- chological state and may lead to lack of attention and irritation. ▶ When the engine is running, always wear ear protection. ▶ Always wear ear protection if the sound pressure level exceeds 85 dB(A). Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.1 Noise emission Suggestion for noise insulation, bellows © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 20: Noise insulation, bellows 01 Compressor casing 02 Bellows 03 Charge air duct / scavenging air duct 04 Insulation cushion 05 Insulation mat (at least 15 mm) 06 Sheet metal cover Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.2 Service work 5.2 Service work Service work includes visual controls, monitoring, measuring and inspection as well as func- tional checks. Service work enables the detection and rectification of changes to the tur- bocharger and ensures full operability of the turbocharger. CAUTION Specific service interval Exceptional stresses such as a high number of starts and stops, harsh envir- onmental conditions, poor fuel quality or high system vibrations can lead to untimely machine damage even if the prescribed service intervals are ob- served. ▶ Agree on a specific service interval with ABB Turbo Systems. To prevent machine damage caused by ageing and downtime, we recommend having an in- spection carried out by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station no later than 5 years after the last service. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 CAUTION Service intervals Any service work on the turbocharger that is omitted or performed too late can cause excessive contamination, wear and operating failures. ▶ Carry out the service work at the specified time intervals. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.2 Service work 5.2.1 Service work every 25 ... 50 hours CAUTION Unknown operational changes Impairment to the degree of a possible operating failure can be the con- sequence. ▶ Have any unknown causes clarified by an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- tion. ▶ Visual check for air, exhaust gas, water and oil leaks. ▶ Record operating data and enter in the engine logbook. ▶ In case of deviations, determine the cause. 5.2.2 Service work at 100 hours after commissioning ▶ Clean or replace the oil filter located in the supply pipe to the turbocharger while the en- gine is stopped, in accordance with the instructions of the enginebuilder. 5.2.3 Service work according to instructions of enginebuilder ▶ Clean or replace the oil filter located in the supply pipe to the turbocharger while the en- gine is stopped, in accordance with the instructions of the enginebuilder. 5.2.4 Service work according to data on the rating plate (Usually after 8000 ... 12000 operating hours) The rotor and bearing parts must be checked and assessed by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. The following work can be carried out as preparation. ▶ Remove turbocharger from engine, dismantle and measure clearance (see Dismantling and fitting, general). ▶ Clean nozzle ring, turbine casing, compressor casing and diffuser, and check for cracks and erosion/corrosion. Application with frequent engine start/stop cycles (Peak shaving) If the turbocharger is used for the ‘Peak shaving’ mode with frequent engine start/stop cycles, the number of successful engine start/stop cycles must be taken into account in ad- dition to the inspection interval for the bearing parts specified on the rating plate (in oper- ating hours). ▶ ABB Turbo Systems recommends having the rotor and bearing parts, as well as the casing parts on the turbine end, including the nozzle ring, checked and maintained by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station after 5000 successful engine start cycles. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.2 Service work 5.2.5 Other service work If a protective grid is installed in the radial or axial gas outlet casing (61001) by ABB Turbo Systems: © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 21: Replacing the protective grid ▶ Remove the protective grid (61205) after 50000 hours and replace it with a new one. Pre-mix gas engines CAUTION Replace the protective grid of pre-mix gas engines after 20000 hours Applications on pre-mix gas engines result in a high thermo-mechanical load on the protective grid. To ensure proper functionality of the protective grid even under these conditions, the protective grid of pre-mix gas engines must be replaced after 20000 hours. ▶ Replace the protective grid of pre-mix gas engines after 20000 hours. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.2 Service work 5.2.6 Entries in the engine logbook Monitoring the engine system makes it possible to draw conclusions on the operating beha- viour of the turbocharger. The following operating data and measured values must be entered regularly into the engine logbook of the enginebuilder: ▪ Number of times the engine is started successfully (possible aborted start cycles do not need to be recorded) ▪ Performance and speed of the engine ▪ Air intake temperature ▪ Pressure of the charge air ▪ Pressure loss in the charge air cooler ▪ Lubricating oil pressure and lubricating oil temperature. If present: ▪ Speed of the turbocharger ▪ Air temperature after the compressor and after the charge air cooler ▪ Exhaust gas temperature before and after the turbine ▪ Pressure loss in the filter silencer. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.3 Expected replacement intervals 5.3 Expected replacement intervals Fuel The expected replacement intervals apply to engine operation with pre-mix gas and diesel oil. Applications with frequent engine start/stop cycles (Peak shaving) In addition to the replacement intervals specified on the rating plate for the compressor and turbine wheel (in operating hours), the number of successful engine start/stop cycles must also be taken into account. Rotating components The recommended replacement intervals of the compressor and turbine wheels are spe- cified with the aid of the safety concept for rotating parts (SIKO) and dependent on the op- erating conditions. These intervals are shown on the rating plate of the turbocharger. When employing the ‘Peak shaving’ mode, ABB Turbo Systems generally recommends repla- cing the compressor and turbine wheel after 20000 successful engine start/stop cycles or after reaching the number of operating hours specified on the rating plate. Non-rotating components Depending on the system-specific operating conditions, a differentiation must be made between the intervals to be expected for: ▪ replacing the bearing parts and ▪ replacing the non-rotating components exposed to hot gas. A decisive role is played by various influencing parameters which, in extreme cases, can drastically reduce the replacement interval of these parts. When utilising the ‘Peak shaving’ mode with frequent engine start/stop cycles, the tur- bocharger components on the exhaust gas side are subjected to high thermal loads. This load can cause thermal fatigue when the operating time and number of engine start cycles increase, thereby resulting in wear and cracking of the components. ABB Turbo Systems therefore recommends having the components periodically inspected and replaced, if neces- sary, by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station based on the number of successful engine start cycles specified in the following table. The individual components will generally be examined for wear and replaced, if necessary, during the prescribed periodic service work. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.3 Expected replacement intervals Expected replacement intervals Operating hours Number of engine start cycles (Peak shaving mode) Turbine casing 25000 ... 50000 5000 ... 10000 Nozzle ring 25000 ... 50000 5000 ... 10000 Gas outlet flange 25000 ... 50000 5000 ... 10000 Heat shield 25000 ... 50000 5000 ... 10000 Bearing casing 25000 ... 50000 5000 ... 10000 Bearing parts 12000 ... 24000 5000 Rotor components See information on rating plate 20000 Other casings 50000 - - Table 10: Expected replacement intervals The specified values are guideline values and not guaranteed values; see Influencing para- meters. Influencing parameters The specified values are guideline values and are not guaranteed. The actual values can devi- ate significantly from the guideline values, for example, due to the following influences: ▪ Fuel quality and fuel treatment ▪ Load profile (thermal cycling, also number of starts/stops, emergency shutdowns, oper- ating point) ▪ Gas inlet temperature ▪ Turbocharger specification ▪ System-specific operating conditions (combustion quality, exhaust gas composition) For bearing parts ▪ Lubricating oil quality (oil filtering, oil condition, oil monitoring) ▪ Load profile (speed, pressure conditions, temperature) ▪ Number of starts/stops ▪ Unbalance of the rotor (degree of contamination). © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 5 Operation and service / 5.4 Stopping the engine 5.4 Stopping the engine CAUTION Residual heat in the turbocharger If the residual heat in the turbocharger is not adequately dissipated, it may damage the engine. ▶ Adequate cooling of the turbocharger must be ensured after stopping the engine. Water-cooled turbocharger variant ▶ Post-lubricate as long as the rotor is turning. ▶ Observe the oil pressure while performing post-lubrication: 0.5 < poil ≤1.0. ▶ Switch off post-lubrication as soon as the rotor is stationary or after no more than two minutes. Deviating procedures must be coordinated with ABB Turbo Systems. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.1 Foreword to maintenance 6 Periodic maintenance work 6.1 Foreword to maintenance Maintenance work includes regular visual controls and cleaning operations which are inten- ded to ensure the trouble-free functioning of the turbocharger. Maintenance interval Maintenance work Operating status Similar to the service interval (usually every 8000 ... 12000 h) Cleaning components mechanically →41 1) Engine stopped Table 11: Maintenance table [h] = Hours of operation 1) ABB Turbo Systems recommends having mechanical cleaning carried out by an ABB Tur- bocharging Service Station during the service work. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.1 Preparation CAUTION Selection of cleaning tools Turbocharger components are sensitive and easily sustain mechanical dam- age. The use of needle descalers (for example) or other striking tools dam- ages the components. Depending on the specification, nozzle rings or tur- bine casings may have protective coatings which can also be damaged. ▶ Use only soft tools such as rags, brushes or wire brushes. ▶ In case of heavy contamination, the cleaning methods described in this chapter (such as soaking, for example) can be repeated until a satisfact- ory result is achieved. The disassembly and assembly of the components is described in chapter Dismantling and fitting →58. ▶ Contaminated water and cleaning agents must be disposed of in an environmentally compatible, professional way and in compliance with locally applicable regulations. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 CAUTION Component damage and corrosion If mechanical cleaning is carried out incorrectly, this can lead to damage and corrosion on the components. ▶ Pay attention to the specifications in this chapter pertaining to mechan- ical cleaning. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.2 Cleaning the filter silencer © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 22: Cleaning the filter silencer 81135 Filter silencer body 81266 Cover grid 81136 Absorption segment 81270 Tension band 81137 Sheet-metal covering 81271 Lock 81265 Filter ring Cleaning the filter ring (if present) ▶ Remove filter ring (81265). ▶ Clean filter ring (81265) as required or every 500 hours of operation and replace after the fifth cleaning process at the latest. Contamination of the filter ring depends on the degree of purity of the sucked-in air. ▶ Rinse the filter ring (81265) with water and mild detergent or, in the case of heavy con- tamination, soak and carefully push through. Rinse in cold water. Avoid high mechanical loads (water jet). ▶ Let the filter ring dry completely before assembling. ▶ Dirty water and mild detergent must be disposed of in compliance with locally applicable regulations. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically Cleaning the absorption segments (see Fig. 22: Cleaning the filter silencer →42) ▶ Loosen the tension bands (81270). ▶ Remove the cover grid (81266). ▶ Pull out and bend up the sheet-metal coverings (81137), and remove the absorption seg- ments (81136). ▶ Clean the absorption segments (81136). When cleaning, note that the absorption segments (81136) must only be cleaned lightly with compressed air, a soft brush or a moist cleaning cloth. ▶ Have any heavily contaminated absorption segments replaced by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Fitting the filter silencer (see Fig. 22: Cleaning the filter silencer →42) ▶ Insert the absorption segments (81136) into the sheet-metal coverings (81137). ▶ Bend the sheet-metal coverings (81137) back to their original shape and insert into the slotted guides in the filter silencer body (81135). ▶ Fit the cover grid (81266). ▶ Fit the tension bands (81270) and tighten them at the locks (81271). ▶ Any tension bands that have become damaged must be replaced. ▶ Fit the filter ring (81265), if present. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.3 Compressor-end, non-rotating parts Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. The following parts, which are relevant in terms of performance, can be cleaned in accord- ance with the description below. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 23: Compressor-end, non-rotating parts 72000 Compressor casing 77000 Wall insert 79000 Diffuser ▶ Clean the above-mentioned components with steam or ultrasound. Alternatively, soak in diesel oil or water containing household cleaning agent. After soaking, remove contamin- ation with a brush. ▶ Dry components completely. ▶ Spray cleaned surfaces with penetrating oil. Do not spray the outer surfaces of the tur- bocharger. ▶ Dispose of contaminated water and cleaning agents in accordance with the information in the material safety data sheet. WARNING Handling operating materials and supplies Swallowing or inhaling vapours of operating materials and supplies or con- tact with them may be harmful to health. ▶ Do not breathe in these substances and avoid contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure proper ventilation. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the operat- ing materials and supplies. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.4 Turbine-end, non-rotating parts Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. Baked layers of contamination, for example, from coked oil occur at the turbine end. The fol- lowing parts, which are relevant in terms of performance, can be cleaned in accordance with the description below. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 24: Turbine end, non-rotating parts 51000 Turbine casing 56001 Nozzle ring 57002 Gas outlet flange 56005 Lamellar sealing ring ▶ Dismantle the lamellar sealing ring (56005) in the nozzle ring. ▶ Place contaminated parts in hot water or in a liquid such as brake cleaner to soften the contamination. ▶ Brush away the contamination or remove with a steam cleaner. ▶ Repeat the soaking and brushing if necessary. ▶ Use clean water to remove all traces of solvent from parts. WARNING Handling operating materials and supplies Swallowing or inhaling vapours of operating materials and supplies or con- tact with them may be harmful to health. ▶ Do not breathe in these substances and avoid contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure proper ventilation. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the operat- ing materials and supplies. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically ▶ Dry components completely. ▶ Spray cleaned surfaces with penetrating oil. Do not spray the outer surfaces of the tur- bocharger. ▶ Dispose of contaminated water and cleaning agents in accordance with the information in the material safety data sheet. 6.2.5 Cartridge group, general CAUTION Corrosion If the cartridge group is not put back into operation immediately after clean- ing, parts may corrode. ▶ Immediately after cleaning, install the cartridge group and put it back into operation. Compressor wheels can be heavily contaminated due to poorly filtered suction air; turbines can be heavily contaminated due to coked oil. Contamination such as this must be removed during the standard service intervals (see chapter Service work). ▶ Remove the turbocharger from the engine (see chapter Removing and Installing →8). ▶ Remove the cartridge group (see chapter Dismantling and fitting →58). First clean the compressor end and then the turbine end according to the following descrip- tion. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.6 Cleaning the cartridge group on compressor end CAUTION Water and contamination in the cartridge group If water or contamination penetrates the cartridge group, this can impair the function of the turbocharger and damage parts inside the cartridge group. ▶ Make sure that no water or contamination can enter into the cartridge group. ▶ Cleaning procedures should be selected that do not result in removal of the compressor wheel material or cause damage to its surfaces. Clean the compressor wheel with a rag or soft brush which has been soaked in water with a household cleaning agent. Do not use a wire brush! ▶ Dry the compressor wheel and the gap between the compressor and the bearing casing with low-pressure pressurized air. ▶ Lightly spray the compressor wheel and the gap between the compressor and the bearing casing with penetrating oil. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agents in accordance with the material safety data sheet. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 CAUTION Selection of the cleaning agent Cleaning agents that contain chlorine corrode metals. ▶ Only use pH-neutral cleaning agents that do not corrode metals. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet. ▶ Observe country-specific regulations regarding banned and restricted substances. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically 6.2.7 Cleaning the cartridge group on turbine end Soaking the contamination Baked layers of contamination from coked oil occur at the turbine end. The contamination can be removed by soaking and brushing. The procedure for soaking the layers of contamin- ation as well as for cleaning the turbine are described in the following. © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 Fig. 25: Soaking the turbine end Product A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] A130 108 17 205 A135 128 20 245 A140 157 25 300 Table 12: Value table for soaking To soak the layers of contamination on the turbine, the cartridge group can be immersed vertically in a container (02) with fluid. ▶ Place the container (02) inside a larger container (03) so that the overflowing fluid can be collected. CAUTION Selection of the cleaning agent Cleaning agents that contain chlorine corrode metals. ▶ Only use pH-neutral cleaning agents that do not corrode metals. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet. ▶ Observe country-specific regulations regarding banned and restricted substances. ▶ Fill the container (02) with soaking fluid. To shorten the soaking time, the fluid can be heated up to a maximum of 60 oC. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 CAUTION Water and contamination in the cartridge group If water or contamination penetrates the cartridge group, this can impair the function of the turbocharger and damage parts inside the cartridge group. ▶ Place the cartridge group on suitable supports (01) made of wood or metal. ▶ Observe dimension (B) for the supports (01) so that the cartridge group is not immersed too deeply. ▶ Let the layers of contamination on the turbine soak for four hours. Removing contamination Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. ▶ Lift up the cartridge group and align it horizontally. ▶ Remove contamination manually using a soft brush or a wire brush. WARNING Heating up of cleaning agents and operating fluids When cleaning agents or operating fluids are heated up, explosive vapours can be produced which are hazardous to health. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet. Wear a respiratory mask according to material safety data sheet. WARNING Health hazard due to soot particles If soot particles enter the eyes or respiratory tract, this can be harmful to health. ▶ Avoid the formation of dust. ▶ Vacuum up dust with a suitable vacuum cleaner. ▶ Wear a respiratory mask to protect against particles (P1 or P2 mask). ▶ Wear safety goggles. Wear safety goggles. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against dusts. Operation Manual / 4 Product description / A130-H.. - A140-H 6 Periodic maintenance work / 6.2 Cleaning components mechanically © Copyright 2020 ABB. All rights reserved. HZTL4030_EN Rev.F February 2020 CAUTION Non-permissible rotor unbalance after cleaning Unevenly distributed residual contamination deposits lead to rotor unbal- ance. This can result in bearing or turbocharger damage. ▶ Remove all traces of contamination from the turbine. ▶ After brushing off the contamination, fill the container (02) with clean water. ▶ Immerse the turbine of the cartridge group in clean water so that any loose contamina- tion comes off. ▶ Lift up the cartridge group and align it horizontally. ▶ Dry the turbine and the gap between the turbine and the heat sheet metal with low-pres- sure pressurized air. ▶ Lightly spray the turbine and the gap between the turbine and the heat sheet metal with penetrating oil. ▶ Dispose of contaminated water and cleaning agents in accordance with the information in the safety data sheet. CAUTION Water and contamination in the cartridge group If water or contamination penetrates the cartridge group, this can impair the function of the turbocharger and damage parts inside the cartridge group. ▶ Make sure that no water or contamination enters the gap between the heat sheet metal and the turbine.


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ABB C13 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ABB C13 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: C13 User Manual C13 User Manual Document ID: 2CMC486004M0201 Revision: C 2019-10-28 Disclaimer The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB AB. ABB AB assumes no responsi- bility for any errors that may appear in this document. In no event shall ABB AB be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental or con- sequential damages of any nature or kind arising from the use of this document, nor shall ABB AB be liable for incidental or consequential damages arising from use of any software or hardware described in this document. Copyrights This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB AB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license. © Copyright 2013 ABB AB. All rights reserved. Trademarks ABB AB is a registered trademark of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders. Contact ABB SPA via Dell'industria 18 20010 - Vittuone - Milano Italy Tel: +39 02 2415 0000 1 About this Manual ........................................................................................ 3 1.1 Conventions Used in this Document ..............................................................................4 2 Product Overview ......................................................................................... 5 2.1 Meter Parts ....................................................................................................................6 2.2 Meter Type .....................................................................................................................7 3 Installation ....................................................................................................9 3.1 Mounting the Meter ......................................................................................................10 3.2 Environmental Considerations .....................................................................................11 3.3 Installing the Meter ......................................................................................................12 3.3.1 Wiring Diagrams ................................................................................................13 3.3.1.1 Outputs .................................................................................................. 13 4 User Interface ............................................................................................. 15 4.1 Display and buttons .....................................................................................................16 4.2 Menu Structure ............................................................................................................17 5 Meter Settings ............................................................................................21 5.1 Setting the Output ........................................................................................................22 5.2 Setting the Alarm .........................................................................................................24 6 Technical Description ................................................................................ 27 6.1 Energy Values .............................................................................................................28 6.2 Instrumentation ............................................................................................................29 6.3 Outputs ........................................................................................................................30 6.4 Alarm ...........................................................................................................................31 7 Technical data ............................................................................................ 33 7.1 Technical Specifications ..............................................................................................34 7.2 Physical Dimensions ....................................................................................................36 8 Troubleshooting ......................................................................................... 37 8.1 Error Codes and Warnings ..........................................................................................38 9 Service & Maintenance .............................................................................. 39 9.1 Service and Maintenance ............................................................................................40 2CMC486004M0201 1 C13 Revision: A User Manual C13 2 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A About this Manual Chapter 1: About this Manual Overview This chapter describes the conventions used in this manual. It also contains expla- nations and definitions of terms and definitions that are used in the document. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 1.1 Conventions Used in this Document .....................................................4 2CMC486004M0201 3 C13 Revision: A User Manual About this Manual 1.1 Conventions Used in this Document Symbols This document contains warning, caution, note and tip icons that point out safety related conditions and other important or useful information. Symbol Description The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock. The caution icon indicates important information or a warning related to the concept discussed in the text. It might indicate the presence of a hazard which could result in corruption of software or damage to equip- ment or property. The note icon alerts the reader to important facts and conditions. The tip icon gives the reader useful information related to the concept discussed in the text. C13 4 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Product Overview Chapter 2: Product Overview Overview This chapter describes the parts of the meter. It also contains information about the meter type. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 2.1 Meter Parts ............................................................................................6 2.2 Meter Type ............................................................................................7 2CMC486004M0201 5 C13 Revision: A User Manual

Product Overview 2.1 Meter Parts Illustration The parts of the meter are shown in the illustration below: 1 1 1 8 2 2 6 5 7 4 3

Parts description The following table describes the parts of the meter: Item Description Comments 1 Terminal for output connections 2 Sealing points 3 Push button For programming and reading metering data 4 LED Flashes in proportion to the energy measured 5 Display LCD for meter reading 6 Sealing label 7 Product data 8 Terminal block C13 6 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A 8 Product Overview 2.2 Meter Type C13 meter The C13 is a compact meter for 3-phase metering. The meter is direct connected for currents up to max. 40 A. Product label The meter type information that is reflected on the product label is shown in the example picture below: Label information The information on the type label is explained in the table below: Item Description 1 Type designation 2 LED pulse frequency 3 Serial number 4 Manufacturing date (year and week) 5 Wiring diagram 6 Bar code with serial number 7 Type designation 8 Energy import 9 Accuracy (active energy) 10 Nominal voltage 11 3-element metering 2CMC486004M0201 7 C13 Revision: A User Manual Product Overview Item Description 12 Frequency 13 LED pulse frequency 14 Pulse frequency 15 Protection class II 16 Operating temperature range 17 Rated current 18 ABB ID C13 8 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Installation Chapter 3: Installation Overview This chapter describes how to mount the C13 meter and how to connect it to an electricity network. In this chapter 3.1 Mounting the Meter .............................................................................. 10 3.2 Environmental Considerations ............................................................. 11 3.3 Installing the Meter ..............................................................................12 3.3.1 Wiring Diagrams ........................................................................13 2CMC486004M0201 9 C13 Revision: A User Manual Installation 3.1 Mounting the Meter General This section describes different ways to mount the C13 meter. For some methods of mounting, additional accessories are needed. For further information about ac- cessories, refer to Main Catalog (2CMC481003C0201). DIN-rail mounted The C13 meters are intended to be mounted on a standard (DIN 50022) DIN-rail. If this method of mounting is used no extra accessories are needed and the meter is fastened on the rail by snapping the DIN-rail lock onto the rail. Wall mounted The recommended way to mount the meter on a wall is to mount a separate DIN- rail on the wall and then mount the meter on the rail. Standard DIN-rail The following picture shows a standard DIN-rail. C13 10 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Installation 3.2 Environmental Considerations Ingress protection To comply with the protection requirements the product must be mounted in pro- tection class IP 51 enclosures, or better, according to IEC60259. Mechanical environment In accordance with the Measuring Directive (2014/32/EU), the product complies with M1, which means that it can be operated in “...locations with vibration and shocks of low significance, e.g. for instruments fastened to light suporting struc- tures subject to negligible vibrations and shocks transmitted from local blasting or pile-driving activities, slamming doors, etc.” Electromagnetic environment In accordance with the Measuring Directive (2014/32/EU), the product complies with E2, which means that it can be operated “...in locations with electro magnetic disturbances corresponding to those likely to be found in other industrial build- ings.” Climatic environmentIn order to work properly the product should not be operated outside the specified temperature range of -25°C – +70°C. In order to work properly the product should not exposed to humidity exceeding the specified 75% yearly average, 95% on 30 days/year. 2CMC486004M0201 11 C13 Revision: A User Manual Installation 3.3 Installing the Meter E Warning – Electrical equipment should only be installed, accessed, serviced and maintained by qualified electrical personnel. Working with high voltage is potentially lethal. Persons subjected to high voltage may suffer cardiac arrest, burn injuries, or other severe injuries. To avoid such injuries, make sure to disconnect the power supply before you start the installation. E Warning – For safety reasons it is recommended that the equipment is installed in a way that makes it impossible to reach or touch the terminal blocks by accident. The best way to make a safe installation is to install the unit in an enclosure. Further, access to the equipment should be limited through use of lock and key, controlled by qualified electrical personnel. E Warning – The meters must always be protected by fuses on the incoming side. In order to allow for maintenance of transformer rated meters, it is recommended that there should be a short circuiting device installed near the meter. Installation To comply with the protection requirements the meter must be mounted in protec- requirements tion class IP 51 enclosures, or better, according to IEC 60259. Meters with wireless communication should not be installed closer than 20 cm from people. Install the meter Follow the steps in the table below to install the meter: Verify the installation C13 12 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Step Action 1 Switch off the mains power. 2 Place the meter on the DIN-rail and make sure it snaps onto it. 3 Strip the cable insulation to the length that is indicated on the meter. 4 Connect the cables according to the wiring diagram that is printed on the me- ter and tighten the screws (0.8 Nm). 5 Install the circuit protection (max 40 A). 6 Connect the output to an external power supply (max 5–40 V). See the wiring diagram printed on the meter. 7 Turn on the mains power. The C13 meter has a red LED next to the push button on the front of the meter that flashes proportionally to the active energy. The LED has a fixed pulse fre- quency of 1000 imp/kWh and can be used to test and verify the installation. If the LED flashes when the mains power is turned on, the installation was successful. Installation 3.3.1 Wiring Diagrams 4-wire connection The following diagram shows a 4-wire connection of a direct connected 3-phase meter: 3.3.1.1 Outputs Fixed, 1 output 1 3 4 6 7 9 1210 2CMC486004M0201 13 C13 Revision: A User Manual Installation C13 14 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A User Interface Chapter 4: User Interface Overview This chapter gives an overview of the display and of the functions of the button on the meter. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 4.1 Display and buttons .............................................................................16 4.2 Menu Structure ....................................................................................17 2CMC486004M0201 15 C13 Revision: A User Manual User Interface 4.1 Display and buttons Display The display consists of icons, digits and letters. The measured value/menu options are displayed with large letters. The measured unit is displayed on the bottom- right side of the display, and the status icons are displayed at the upper part of the display, see figure below. 123k Arh Status Icons The status icons are shown in the table below. Icon Indication Comment Active error When a error has been detected, ! the icon will be lit on the display. When no error has been detected, the icon will be turned off. Metering in progress. When a load is connected to the meter, the icon will flash to indicate metering. When no load is con- nected, the icon will be turned off. Button The meter has one push button which is located below the display. A short press on the button (less than 1 sec) will step through the menu/submenu. A long press (more than 1 sec) followed by a release of the button will open the set menu or select an item in the menu.C13 16 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A User Interface 4.2 Menu Structure Overview This section will give an introduction to the menu structure. Menu structure The menu structure of the meter can be viewed in the following figure View menu Set menu Select function Set alarm –Active energy Alarm power –Active energy max resolution –– Output Exit Alarm voltage, L1 Alarm level Alarm voltage, L2 on– Active power, total Alarm voltage, L3 Alarm on delay – Active power, L1 – Active power, L2 Alarm current, L1 Alarm current, L2 Alarm level off – Active power, L3 Alarm current, L3 – Voltage, L1 – Voltage, L2 Alarm power factor Save –Exit –– Navigation To navigate in the menu, use the short press to navigate between the different menu items, and the long press to select a menu item. When performing settings, the short press is used to change the value of a specific setting, and the long press is used to toggle between different digits. View menu In the view menu, the following choices can be made. Alarm off delay – Voltage, L3 – Current, L2 – Current, L2 – Output state – Version – CrC Pulse output Current, L1 Out on Out off Power factor Exit Error Choice in menu Output on display No. of digits No. of decimals Unit Min. value Max. value Active energy <numerical value> kWh 7 0 kWh 0 9999999 2CMC486004M0201 17 C13 Revision: A User Manual User Interface Choice in menu Output on No. of display digits C13 18 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A No. of decimals Unit Min. value Max. value Active energy max resolution <numerical value> Wh 6 3 Wh 0 999.999 Active power Total <numerical value> W 5 0 W 0 99999 Active power Phase 1 <numerical value> W 5 0 W 0 99999 Active power Phase 2 <numerical value> W 5 0 W 0 99999 Active power Phase 3 <numerical value> W 5 0 W 0 99999 Voltage Phase 1 <numerical value> V 3 0 V 0 999 Voltage Phase 2 <numerical value> V 3 0 V 0 999 Voltage Phase 3 <numerical value> V 3 0 V 0 999 Current Phase 1 <numerical value> A 3 1 A 0 99.9 Current Phase 2 <numerical value> A 3 1 A 0 99.9 Current Phase 3 <numerical value> A 3 1 A 0 99.9 Power factor <numerical value> 4 3 N/A 0 1 Output state - Alarm on, or  N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A - Alarm off, or  N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A - Output on, or  N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A - Output off, or  N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A - Pulse out  N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Firmware version Part 1 N/A 3 N/A N/A 1 255 Firmware version Part 2 N/A 3 N/A N/A 0 255 Firmware version Part 3 N/A 3 N/A N/A 0 255 User Interface Choice in menu Output on No. of display digits Set menu The set menu is used to set different options in the meter. The set menu is reached by using the long press when located in the view menu. The following choices are available in the set menu, see table below. Set alarm menu When choosing Exit, the menu will return to the view menu. When choosing Out- put, the following choices will be available. No. of decimals Unit Min. value Max. value CRC Part 1 N/A 4 N/A N/A 0000 FFFF CRC Part 2 N/A 4 N/A N/A 0000 FFFF Error Er <numerical value> Choice in menu Output on display Output  Exit  Choice in menu Output on display Explanation Alarm power  VV 4 N/A N/A N/A N/A By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured power. Alarm voltage  V By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured voltage on Phase 1. Alarm voltage  V By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured voltage on Phase 2. Alarm voltage  V By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured voltage on Phase 3. Alarm current  A By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured current on Phase 1. Alarm current  A By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured current on Phase 2. Alarm current  A By choosing this option, the alarm will be set with regards to the measured current on Phase 3. 2CMC486004M0201 19 C13 Revision: A User Manual User Interface Choice in menu Output on display Explanation Alarm power factor  By choosing this option, the alarm will be set regarding to the measured power factor. Pulse output  By choosing this option, the pulse output function will be ac- tivated. Out on  By choosing this option, the output will be set to static on. Out off  By choosing this option, the output will be set to static off. Exit  Go back to the set menu. When either Alarm power, Alarm voltage, Alarm current or Alarm factor has been chosen, the following choices will be available. Choice Output on display Unit Explanation Alarm level on  W/V/A/- When the measured value passes the set value, the alarm will be triggered. Alarm on delay  seconds When the measured value passes the set value and remains for the set time, the alarm will be triggered. Alarm level off  W/V/A/- When the measured value passes the set value, the alarm will be cleared. Alarm off delay  seconds When the measured value passes the set value and remains for the set time, the alarm will be cleared. Save  N/A This option saves the alarm settings. Exit  N/A Go back to the set menu without saving. Use this option to view the current alarm settings. C13 20 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Meter Settings Chapter 5: Meter Settings Overview This chapter describes how to configure the functions of the meter, including alarm settings. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 5.1 Setting the Output ................................................................................ 22 5.2 Setting the Alarm .................................................................................24 2CMC486004M0201 21 C13 Revision: A User Manual Meter Settings 5.1 Setting the Output About the output The C13 meter has one output which can be used for three different purposes. When one of the three options has been chosen for the output, the remaining two options are automatically disabled. • Alarm monitoring The output is used for monitoring if an alarm has been triggered or not. • Static level The output is set as static, either as static on or static off. • Pulse output The output is set as a pulse output. Output state The Output state in the main menu indicates what function is activated. See table below for the different functions that can be activated Activated function Output on display Comment Alarm on  The alarm is set and has been trig- gered.The pulse output exit is deacti- vated. Alarm off  The alarm is set but has not been trig- gered. The pulse output exit is deacti- vated. Output on  There is always a continous signal on the output. Output off  The output is closed for all traffic, both in- bound and outbound. Pulse out  The output is activated with a frequency based on measured energy. The alarm function is deactivated. Set output to To set the pulse output to be available for pulse measuring, perform the following pulse output steps when located in the view menu. Step Action Comment 1 When located in the view menu, use the long press to get to the set menu. C13 22 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A - 2 Use the long press to get to the selection of func- tions menu. - 3 Toggle through the menu to get to the Pulse out choice. Use the long press to choose Pulse out ( on the display). The Pulse out choice in the selection of function menu is displayed as:  Meter Settings Disable output The output can also be disabled by performing the following steps when located in the view menu. Step Action Comment

1 When located in the view menu, use the long press to get to the set menu -

Activate output To activate the output, perform the following steps when located in the view menu.

2 Use the long press to get to the selection of func- tion menu. - 3 Toggle through the menu to get to the Output off choice ( on the display). Use the long press to choose the Output off. The Output off choice in the view menu is dis- played as: 

Step Action Comment

1 When located in the view menu, use the long press to get to the set menu. - 2 Use the long press to get to the selection of func- tion menu. - 3 Toggle through the menu to get to the Output on choice ( on the display). Use the long press to choose the Output on. The Output on choice in the view menu is displayed as: 

2CMC486004M0201 23 C13 Revision: A User Manual Meter Settings 5.2 Setting the Alarm About the alarm The alarm function gives the user the possibility to set an alarm that will trigger when a defined limit is reached by the measured value. See table for more infor- mation. Choice in menu Unit Output on display Range Alarm power W  0–99999 W W Alarm voltage Phase 1 V  V If the value is set above the max range, the meter will automatically set the value to the max value allowed by the range. Example: Alarm current is set to 100.0 A by the user, but the max value is 40.0 A, so the meter will use the max value, in this case 40.0 A. If an alarm has been set, the output state will indicate if the alarm is triggered (AL On) or not (AL OFF). The magnitude of the set alarm is also displayed in the output state. Set alarm To set an alarm, perform the following steps when located in the view menu. C13 24 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A 0–299 V Alarm voltage Phase 2 V  V 0–299 V Alarm voltage Phase 3 V  V 0–299 V Alarm current Phase 1 A  A 0–40.00 A Alarm current Phase 2 A  A 0–40.00 A Alarm current Phase 3 A  A 0–40.00 A Alarm power factor -  0–0.999 Step Action Comment 1 Use the long press to get to the set menu - 2 Use the long press to get to the selection of function menu - 3 Toggle through the menu to choose what mag- nitude to set. Choose one of the following: Alarm power (W), Alarm voltage (V), Alarm current (A) and Alarm factor (no magnitude). Use the long press to choose. 4 Set the alarm value that the measured value must pass in order for the alarm to trigger (Alarm level on). Use the short press to change the value of the digit, and the long press to step through the different digits. Meter Settings Step Action Comment

5 Set the time frame that the measured value must pass the set alarm value in order for the alarm to trigger (Alarm on delay). Use the short press to change the value of the digit, and the long press to step through the different digits.

Read alarm The Output option in the View menu shows whether a programmed alarm has been triggered or not. A triggered alarm displays as AL On, and an alarm that has not been triggered displays as AL OFF.

6 Set the alarm value that the measured value must pass in order for the alarm to be cleared (Alarm level off). Use the short press to change the value of the digit, and the long press to step through the different digits. 7 Set the time frame that the measured value must pass the set alarm value in order for the alarm to be cleared (Alarm off delay). Use the short press to change the value of the digit, and the long press to step through the different digits. 8 To save the alarm settings and enable the alarm function, use the long press when lo- cated in the save-menu ( on the display). After performing this setting, the alarm is set. If not choosing the option save, the settings will not be saved and the previously saved setting will be used in- stead. The alarm will not be ac- tivated.

2CMC486004M0201 25 C13 Revision: A User Manual Meter Settings C13 26 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Technical Description Chapter 6: Technical Description Overview This chapter describes the technical functions of the C13 meter. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 6.1 Energy Values .....................................................................................28 6.2 Instrumentation ....................................................................................29 6.3 Outputs ................................................................................................30 6.4 Alarm ...................................................................................................31 2CMC486004M0201 27 C13 Revision: A User Manual Technical Description 6.1 Energy Values General The energy values are stored in energy registers. The different energy registers can be divided into: • Registers containing active energy. The energy values can be read directly on the display by using the button on the meter.

Presentation of register values In direct connected meters the energy is usually displayed with a fixed unit and number of decimals (normally kWh, with no decimals).

C13 28 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A In case the energy is displayed with fixed units and number of decimals the energy will “roll over” to zeros when the energy is increment ed if all nines are displayed. The meter can however contain more digits internally, which can be read out via communication if the meter is equipped with a communication interface. Technical Description 6.2 Instrumentation

Instrumentation functions The following table shows the complete instrumentation functions of the C13 me- ter. Instrumentation C13

Active power L1 X Active power L2 X Active power L3 X Voltage L1 - N X Voltage L2 - N X Voltage L3 - N X Current L1 X Current L2 X Current L3 X Power factor, Total X Accuracy All instrumentation data accuracy is defined within the voltage range -20% – +15% of the stated nominal voltage and within the current range 5% of the base current to the maximum current. 2CMC486004M0201 29 C13 Revision: A User Manual Technical Description 6.3 Outputs About outputs The C13 meter has one output which can be used for three different purposes. When one of the three options has been choosen for the output, the remaining two options are automatically disabled. • Alarm monitoring The output is used for monitoring if an alarm has been triggered or not. • Static level The output is set as static, either as static on or static off. • Pulse output The output is set as a pulse output. On the pulse output the meter sends out a specified number of pulses (pulse fre- quency) per kilowatt hour (kilovar for reactive pulse outputs). The amount of pulses sent out are in proportion to the energy flowed through the meter. The meter has a pulse output frequency of 1000 imp/kWh and the pulse width is 100 ms. C13 30 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Technical Description 6.4 Alarm General The purpose of the alarm function is to enable monitoring of quantities in the meter. Monitoring can be set to high or low level detection. High level detection gives an alarm when the level of a quantity goes above the set level. Low level detection gives an alarm when the value goes below the set level. Quantities Depending on the meter type all or a subset of the following quantities can be monitored: • Active power • Power factor • Current L • Voltage L-N

Functional description When the value of the monitored quantity passes the activation level, and remains there for a period of time equal or longer than the specified time delay, the alarm is activated. In the same way, the alarm is deactivated when the value passes the deactivation level and remains there for a time equal to or longer than the speci- fied time delay. If the activation level is higher than the deactivation level, the alarm is activated when the value of the monitored quantity is higher than the activation level.

If the activation level is lower than the deactivation level, the alarm is activated when the vale of the monitored quantity is lower than the activation level. 2CMC486004M0201 31 C13 Revision: A User Manual Technical Description C13 32 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Technical data Chapter 7: Technical data Overview This chapter contains the technical specifications and the physical dimensions of the meter. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 7.1 Technical Specifications ......................................................................34 7.2 Physical Dimensions ...........................................................................36 2CMC486004M0201 33 C13 Revision: A User Manual Technical data 7.1 Technical Specifications Specifications for C13 direct connected meter Voltage/current inputs Nominal voltage 3x230/400 VAC Voltage range 3x220–240 VAC (-20% – +15%) Power dissipation voltage circuits 1.5 VA (0.6 W) total Power dissipation current circuits 0.04 VA (0.04 W) per phase at 230 VAC and Ib Base current Ib 5 A Reference current Iref 5 A Transitional current Itr 0.5 A Maximum current Imax 40 A Minimum current Imin 0.25 A Starting current Ist < 20 mA Terminal wire area 0.5–10 mm2 Recommended tightening torque 0.8 Nm General data Frequency 50 or 60 Hz ± 5% Accuracy 1% (Cl. 1, Cl. B) Display of energy 7-digit LCD Mechanical Material Polycarbonate in transparent front glass. Glass reinforced polycarbonate in bottom case and upper case. Polycarbonate in terminal cover. Weight 190 g Environmental Operating temperature -25°C – +70°C Storage temperature -25°C – +85°C Humidity 75% yearly average, 95% on 30 days/year. Resistance to fire and heat Terminal 960°C, cover 650°C (IEC 60695-2-1) Pulse output Current 2–100 mA Voltage 5–40 VDC Pulse output frequency 1000 imp/kWh Pulse length 100 ms Terminal wire area 0.5–6 mm2 Recommended tightening torque 0.8 Nm Pulse indicator(LED) Pulse frequency 1000 imp/kWh Pulse length 40 ms EMC compatibility C13 34 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Technical data Impulse voltage test 6 kV 1.2/50μs (IEC 60060-1) Surge voltage test 4 kV 1.2/50μs (IEC 61000-4-5) Fast transient burst test 4 kV (IEC 61000-4-4) Immunity to electromagnetic HF-fields 80 MHz – 2 GHz at 10 V/m (IEC61000-4-3) Immunity to conducted disturbance 150kHz – 80MHz (IEC 61000-4-6)

Immunity to electromagnetic distur- bances 2–150 kHz for kWh-meters

Radio frequency emission EN 55022, class B (CISPR22) Electrostatic discharge 15 kV (IEC 61000-4-2) Standards IEC 62052-11, IEC 62053-21 class 1, GB/T 17215.211-2006, GB/T 17215.321-2008 class 1 & 2, GB 4208-2008, EN 50470- 1, EN 50470-3 category B 2CMC486004M0201 35 C13 Revision: A User Manual Technical data 7.2 Physical Dimensions C13 The following drawing shows the physical dimensions of the C13 meter C13 36 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Troubleshooting Chapter 8: Troubleshooting Overview This chapter describes the error codes and the warnings that can be received from the meter. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 8.1 Error Codes and Warnings ..................................................................38 2CMC486004M0201 37 C13 Revision: A User Manual Troubleshooting 8.1 Error Codes and Warnings

Error codes Warnings Error code Description Warning Description

C13 38 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A Er0041 Program CRC error Er0042 Persistent storage CRC error Er0051 Vref is not vdd/2 Er0052 Temperature sensor error Er1007 Negative power Er1008 Frequency outside meter specification Service & Maintenance Chapter 9: Service & Maintenance Overview This chapter contains information about service and maintenance of the product. In this chapter The following topics are covered in this chapter: 9.1 Service and Maintenance ....................................................................40 2CMC486004M0201 39 C13 Revision: A User Manual Service & Maintenance 9.1 Service and Maintenance Service This product contains no parts that can be repaired or exchanged. A broken meter must be replaced. Cleaning If the meter needs to be cleaned, use a lightly moistened cloth with a mild deter- gent to wipe it. C Caution – Be careful that no liquid gets into the meter since it can ruin the equipment. C13 40 2CMC486004M0201 User Manual Revision: A


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ABB TPS52-F33 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ABB TPS52-F33 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: Operation Manual TPS52-F33 ABB Turbocharging ABB Turbo Systems Ltd CH 5401 Baden Type TPS52-F33 HT845348 nMmax 843 t Mmax 680 1/s °C nBmax 801 t Bmax 650 SOLD06 00250 kg 20 60 60 Year 2020 Application according to the Operation Manual made in Switzerland Operating condition and replacement intervals The operational limits for the turbocharger nBmax, tBmax, nMmax, tMmax, inspection- and replacement intervals for the compon- ents concerned on the rating plate are valid for the operational mode and compressor inlet condition, which has been agreed upon between the engine builder and ABB. Note: Replacement intervals of components depends on the load profile, turbine inlet temperature, suction air temperature and turbocharger speed. In case the operation conditions differs significantly from what is considered to be normal for the cur- rent application, it is recommended to contact ABB for a re-calculation of replacement intervals. Frequent load alterations, high temperatures and high speed lower the life of components. Unless otherwise agreed, the application limits nMmax, tMmax are valid for the test operation for a limited time. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. Table of contents Operation Manual 1 Preliminary remarks................................................................................................. 3 1.1 Purpose of this manual.................................................................................................. 3 1.2 Layout and function........................................................................................................ 4 1.3 Intended use of the turbocharger .............................................................................. 6 1.4 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts....................................................... 7 1.5 Essential information..................................................................................................... 9 1.6 Symbols and definitions.............................................................................................. 11 1.7 Turbocharger rating plate........................................................................................... 12 1.8 Contact information..................................................................................................... 13 2 Safety...................................................................................................................... 14 2.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 14 2.2 CE conformity................................................................................................................ 14 2.3 Definition of mandatory signs ................................................................................... 15 2.4 Definition of Safety instructions ............................................................................... 15 2.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger......................................................................... 16 2.6 Safe operation and maintenance............................................................................... 16 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance........................................................... 20 2.8 Deflagration on gas engines....................................................................................... 25 2.9 Periodic checking of the pressure vessel................................................................. 26 2.10 Lifting loads ................................................................................................................... 26 3 Start-up ................................................................................................................. 28 3.1 Oil supply ........................................................................................................................ 28 3.2 Inspection work............................................................................................................. 32 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation........................................................ 34 4 Operation............................................................................................................... 35 4.1 Noise emissions ............................................................................................................ 35 4.2 Servicing work ............................................................................................................... 36 4.3 Expected exchange intervals...................................................................................... 39 4.4 Speed measurement .................................................................................................... 41 4.5 Stopping the engine.................................................................................................... 44 5 Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 45 5.1 Foreword to Maintenance.......................................................................................... 45 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation ........................................................... 46 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation........................................................................... 50 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically.......................................................................... 56 © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. Table of contents 6 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................... 67 6.1 Malfunctions when starting........................................................................................ 67 6.2 Surging of the turbocharger...................................................................................... 68 6.3 Malfunctions during operation ................................................................................. 69 6.4 Malfunctions when stopping...................................................................................... 72 6.5 Speed measurement system...................................................................................... 73 7 Removal and installation...................................................................................... 74 7.1 Transport........................................................................................................................ 74 7.2 Turbocharger weights.................................................................................................. 75 7.3 Removing the turbocharger........................................................................................ 75 7.4 Installing the turbocharger......................................................................................... 76 8 Disassembly and assembly.................................................................................. 78 8.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 78 8.2 Module weights............................................................................................................. 81 8.3 Disassembling and assembling turbocharger........................................................ 82 8.4 Axial clearance A and radial clearance B.................................................................. 96 8.5 Radial clearances N and R........................................................................................... 98 8.6 Table of tightening torques..................................................................................... 100 9 Taking out of operation .................................................................................... 101 9.1 Shutting down the turbocharger ............................................................................ 101 10 Mothballing the turbocharger........................................................................... 105 10.1 Taking the engine out of operation for up to 12 months.................................... 105 10.2 Taking the engine out of operation for more than 12 months......................... 106 11 Disposing of turbocharger components.......................................................... 108 12 Spare parts........................................................................................................... 109 12.1 Ordering spare parts.................................................................................................. 109 12.2 View of turbocharger showing part numbers....................................................... 110 12.3 View of cartridge group showing part numbers .................................................. 112 © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.1 Purpose of this manual 1 Preliminary remarks 1.1 Purpose of this manual © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 This Operation Manual belongs to the turbocharger with the identical serial number (01), see the cover sheet of the Operation Manual and the turbocharger rating plate. Operation Manual This Operation Manual helps familiarise the user with the turbocharger from ABB Turbocharging and how to use it as intended. It provides important information in order that the turbocharger can be operated safely, correctly and efficiently. This Operation Manual complements and expands existing national reg- ulations concerning work safety and accident prevention. Target group This Operation Manual is intended for engineers and qualified mechan- ics who are responsible for operating the engine and the turbocharger installed on it. Availability of operation manual An operation manual must be available at all times at the place where the turbocharger is used. Everyone who operates or works on the turbocharger must have first read and understood the operation manual. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.2 Layout and function 1.2 Layout and function © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 1Suction branch / filter silencer 8Gas outlet flange 2Compressor casing 9Nozzle ring 3Diffuser 10Turbine casing 4Bearing casing 11Turbine-end bearing flange 5Axial thrust bearing 12Compressor-end bearing flange 6Radial plain bearing (visible only at turbine end) 13Compressor wheel 7Turbine Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.2 Layout and function Mode of operation The turbocharger is a turbomachine consisting of the following main components: ▪ Turbine ▪ Compressor These are mounted on a common shaft. Exhaust gases from the diesel or gas engine flow through the turbine casing (10) and the nozzle ring (9) to impinge on the turbine (7). The turbine (7) uses the energy contained in the exhaust gas to drive the compressor wheel (13). The compressor draws in fresh air, compresses it and then forces it into the engine's cylinders. The exhaust gases escape into the ambient air through the exhaust gas pipe, which is connected to the gas outlet flange (8). The air, which is necessary for operation of the diesel or gas engine and is compressed in the turbocharger, is drawn into the compressor wheel (13) through the suction branch or filter silencer (1). It then passes through the diffuser (3) and leaves the turbocharger through the outlet on the compressor casing (2). The rotor runs in two radial plain bearings (6), which are located in the bearing flanges (11/12) between the compressor and the turbine. The axial thrust bearing (5) is located between the two radial plain bearings. The bearings are connected to a central lubricating oil duct which is sup- plied by the engine's lubricating oil circuit. The oil outlet is always at the lowest point of the bearing casing (4). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.3 Intended use of the turbocharger 1.3 Intended use of the turbocharger NOTICE This turbocharger supplied by ABB Turbocharging has been developed for use on diesel engines to generate the volume of air and the char- ging pressure required to operate the engine. The enginebuilder has provided ABB Turbocharging with information regarding the intended use of the engine, from which the operating limits specific to the turbocharger shown on the rating plate, such as operating speeds, temperatures, exchange intervals / replacement in- tervals, have been derived. Use in connection with a gas engine requires that the engine is not in- stalled in a potentially explosive environment and that precautions are taken to ensure that the engine room as a whole is classified as non-ex- plosive. Any other use is considered to be a special application, which must first be clarified with ABB Turbocharging. The manufacturer accepts no liab- ility for any other type of use. If the equipment is used for any other purpose, ABB Turbocharging reserves the right to reject all warranty claims. State of the art This turbocharger was built according to state-of-the-art technology and is operationally safe according to recognised safety regulations. WARNING Improper operation and maintenance of the turbocharger can result in danger to life and limb of the user or third parties. In addition, im- proper use may cause damage to the machine. ▶ The machine may be operated only by trained personnel. Use of the turbocharger as intended also includes observance of the in- stallation / fitting, disassembly / removal, operating, maintenance / ser- vicing and repair conditions specified by the manufacturer. Disposal reg- ulations set down by local authorities must be observed. Perfect condition The turbocharger may be installed only when in technically perfect condi- tion while observing the instructions given in the engine builder's manual. It may be used only for the intended purpose and operated in compliance with the operation manual. ▶ Malfunctions which could affect safety must be eliminated immedi- ately. The manufacturer accepts no liability for any damage resulting from un- authorised alterations to the turbocharger. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.4 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts 1.4 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts up to 6 months New turbochargers and spare parts from ABB Turbocharging can be stored in sealed packaging without additional mothballing measures for up to 6 months from the date of delivery (marked by the VCI label on the package). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor (VCI) Only dry rooms in which the relative humidity is between 40...70 % and no condensation can form are suitable for storage. Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts for more than 6 months (VCI) WARNING Protection of health when handling VCIs VCI products are not hazardous in the sense of the Hazardous Sub- stances Ordinance. Nevertheless, the following points are to be ob- served when handling VCIs: ▶ Ensure good room ventilation. ▶ Do not eat, drink or keep food at the workplace while working with VCIs. ▶ Wear safety gloves. ▶ Clean hands and face after working with VCIs. ▶ For further information refer to branopac.com. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. The following mothballing measures are required every 6 months: ▶ Open the package. ▶ Remove the VCI corrosion protection emitter from the package and replace it with a new, identical VCI corrosion protection emitter. New VCI corrosion protection emitters can be obtained at brano- pac.com. ▶ Dispose of the old VCI corrosion protection emitter in an environ- mentally compatible manner, professionally and in accordance with local regulations. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.4 Storage of new turbochargers and spare parts ▶ Seal the package. The better the external seal is designed, the more permanent the protection. Long-term storage of turbochargers The turbochargers will be prepared for prolonged storage by ABB Tur- bocharging on request. The package is equipped with a hygrometer (see illustration). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 The following measures are required every 6 months: ▶ Check the hygrometer (02) in the sight-glass. There is an opening (01) in the wooden crate which allows this check to be carried out. When the display field has changed colour at the 70% level, the maximum permissible humidity has been exceeded. In this case, the turbochar- ger must be inspected by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station and repacked. ▶ Inspect the package for damage. If the package is damaged, the tur- bocharger must be inspected by an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- tion and repacked. After every 3 years the following work steps must be performed by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station: ▪ Inspect the component ▪ Replace the desiccant agent ▪ Repackage the component. NOTICE Turbocharger ready for operation If the 70% field of the hygrometer (02) has not changed colour and the package is undamaged, the turbocharger can be put into operation without any prior inspection by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Unpacking the turbochargers The corrosion protection effect ends after the material is unpacked from the VCI package. To avoid the formation of condensation, the surroundings and the con- tent of the package must have the same temperature during unpacking. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.5 Essential information 1.5 Essential information Organisational measures In addition to the Operation Manual, the general statutory regulations for the prevention of accidents and protection of the environment are also to be observed. This also applies for the provision and wearing of personal protective equipment. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE The manner in which personnel work on and with the turbocharger with regard to safety and risks is to be checked on a regular basis in accord- ance with the Operation Manual. ▶ If the turbocharger shows modifications affecting safety or any cor- responding operating behaviour, it must be shut down immediately by stopping the engine. The malfunction must be reported to the per- son or department responsible. NOTICE Any modifications, additions or conversions made to the turbocharger that could impair safety require the prior approval of ABB Turbochar- ging. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.5 Essential information Original parts and safety Original parts and accessories are specially designed for the turbochar- ger supplied by ABB. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Use original parts Operation of the turbocharger with non-original parts can impair the safety of the turbocharger and can cause serious damage to property and injury to personnel. ▶ Only use original parts from ABB. ABB accepts no liability for any damage resulting from the use of non- original parts and corresponding accessories. Competence of personnel The turbocharger must only be operated and serviced by trained and au- thorised personnel. Basic mechanical training is a prerequisite. Design variants This document is valid for different design variants of turbochargers. There may be sections and descriptions of components that are not rel- evant for a specific turbocharger variant. ABB Turbocharging Service Stations will be happy to provide information on questions regarding a design variant (see Contact information at abb.com/turbocharging). Accuracy of illustrations The illustrations in this document are general in nature and intended for ease of understanding. Differences in detail are therefore possible. Registered Trademarks Registered trademarks of external companies are used in this document. The trademarks are marked with ®. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.6 Symbols and definitions 1.6 Symbols and definitions The following symbols are used in the documents: > Prerequisite ▶ Work step ▪ Enumeration, first level - Enumeration, second level → Refers to a page number Definition of notes © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Note A note provides suggestions which facilitate the work on the product. Definition of mandatory signs Mandatory signs show the protective equipment to be worn for a task. The mandatory signs are described in chapter Safety and must be com- plied with. Definition of caution / warning The caution and warning signs are described in the chapter Safety. ABB Turbocharging ABB Switzerland Ltd, Turbocharging is identified as ABB Turbocharging in this document. Official service stations of ABB Turbocharging Official service stations are regularly audited and certified by ABB Tur- bocharging. See also chapter Contact information →13. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.7 Turbocharger rating plate 1.7 Turbocharger rating plate Operating limits 01 Turbocharger operating limits at engine overload (110 %). Only when operating in the test rig unless otherwise agreed with the enginebuilder. 02 Turbocharger operating limits during operation

Recommended inspection and replacement intervals for turbocharger compon- ents 03 Inspection interval for plain bearings in 1000 h 04 Replacement interval for compressor in 1000 h 05 Replacement interval for turbine in 1000 h

Further information 06 Part number for customer 07 Designation of special design 08 Turbocharger weight in kg 09 Turbocharger type 10 Serial number 11 Year of turbocharger construction 12 Manufacturing plant © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 1 Preliminary remarks / 1.8 Contact information 1.7.1 Explanation of the rating plate The recommended replacement intervals and the corresponding opera- tional limits are jointly defined with the engine manufacturer. This in- formation is specific to the system. Operation above the indicated values nBmax, tBmax can considerably shorten the recommended replacement intervals. In such cases, we recommend that you contact the nearest official ABB Turbocharging service station. nMmaxand tMmax normally apply only when running at overload (110%) during trials on the engine test bed. Operation above nMmax and tMmax is not permit- ted. Non-observance of the recommended replacement intervals increases the risk of unpredictable component failures. 1.7.2 Positions of the rating plates One rating plate (01) each is attached on the left and the right side of the turbocharger bearing casing. 1.8 Contact information Contact information for the official service stations of ABB Turbochar- ging is available online. ▶ Scan the QR code to access our website. ABB Switzerland Ltd, Turbocharging Bruggerstrasse 71a CH-5401 Baden Switzerland abb.com/turbocharging © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.1 Introduction 2 Safety 2.1 Introduction Turbochargers manufactured by ABB are state of the art and comply with the pertinent safety and health-protection requirements that ap- plied when the turbocharger was manufactured. Consequently, the tur- bocharger is safe to operate. Nevertheless, during turbocharger opera- tion and when working on the turbocharger, residual risks can exist which: ▪ originate from the turbocharger itself and its accessories ▪ originate from the operating and auxiliary materials used ▪ are the consequence of insufficient observance of the safety instruc- tions ▪ are the consequence of unsatisfactory and improper execution of maintenance and inspection work. The operating company is responsible for access to the turbocharger as well as the organisational measures that regulate the safe handling of the turbocharger by its personnel. All instructions contained in this chapter must be observed for safe and trouble-free operation of the turbocharger and during all work on the turbocharger. All further safety instructions contained and specifically identified in every chapter of this manual (see section Definition of Safety Instruc- tions) must also be observed. 2.2 CE conformity Information ABB turbochargers fulfil Directive 2006/42/EC on machinery and are considered partly completed machinery in the sense of Article 2 g. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.3 Definition of mandatory signs 2.3 Definition of mandatory signs To be worn at all times © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020

Ear protection Safety helmet

2.4 Definition of Safety instructions The following symbols and terms used in this manual concern safety or refer to possible hazards: WARNING Definition of warning Serious personal injuries and even accidents with fatal consequences may occur if work and operating instructions marked with this symbol and the word WARNING are either not followed or not followed pre- cisely. ▶ Warning signs must be observed at all times. CAUTION Definition of caution Serious machine or property damage may occur if work and operating instructions marked with this symbol and the word CAUTION are either not followed or not followed precisely. ▶ Caution signs must be observed at all times.

Safety footwear to pro- tect against mechanical hazard and risk of fall- ing To be worn according to the specific work Safety glasses Safety gloves against - Mechanical hazard - Chemical hazard - Thermal hazard Protective clothing Safety goggles Respiratory mask against - Dusts - Gases

Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger 2.5 Warning plates on the turbocharger Warning plates are attached to the turbocharger at the following places: If warning plates are not present at the intended places or are not legible, then proceed as follows: ▶ Order new warning plates from ABB Turbocharging Service Stations. ▶ Remove unreadable warning plates. ▶ Clean and degrease surfaces provided for warning plates. ▶ Attach new warning plates. Uninsulated turbochargers When uninsulated turbochargers are delivered to the engine builder, the warning plates must be subsequently attached to the insulation. This is the responsibility of the engine builder. 2.6 Safe operation and maintenance The instructions specified in this section are for the safety of personnel. Together with the instructions in the Hazards during operation and maintenance section, they allow the user to safely use the turbocharger. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.6 Safe operation and maintenance Work safety and work area safety © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Risk of falling There is the risk that someone can fall when working on the turbochar- ger. ▶ Do not climb on the turbocharger or on parts attached to it or use these as climbing aids. ▶ When working at levels above the head, use climbing aids and work platforms suitable for this purpose. ▶ Observe all general regulations for the prevention of accidents. ▶ Do not work on the turbocharger if you are under physical or mental stress. ▶ Work only with suitable tools as well as equipment and working ma- terials that are in perfect condition. ▶ Electric tools must be solidly earthed, and connecting cables may not be damaged. ▶ Keep the workplace clean, clear away loose objects and remove obstacles on the floor. ▶ Keep the floor, equipment and the turbocharger clean. ▶ Have oil binding materials ready at hand and keep oil catch pans ready or in position ▶ Eliminate leaks. ▶ Keep fire-protection materials and fire-extinguishing equipment ready. Welding work close to the turbocharger ▶ If welding work is being carried out in the vicinity of the turbocharger, cover the filter silencer so that the filter mat is not damaged. ▶ Remove combustible objects and substances out of the range of fly- ing sparks. ▶ Cover all connections on the turbocharger so that no foreign objects can get into the turbocharger. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) for welding operations. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.6 Safe operation and maintenance Safety during start-up / commissioning and operation © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING The turbine casing insulation of the TPS44-F supplied by ABB is also burst protection Serious personal injuries or fatal accidents can occur, if the turbine cas- ing insulation of the TPS44-F supplied by ABB is removed. The burst protection is integrated into the turbine casing insulation of the TPS44- F supplied by ABB. Separate burst protection is fitted to TPS44-F turbochargers that have been ordered from ABB without insulation. ▶ Never operate TPS44-F turbochargers that have been supplied by ABB with insulation if this insulation from ABB is not in place. ▶ Never operate turbochargers without burst protection. If the insula- tion from ABB is not in place, the separate burst protection (57200) must be fitted before operation (see View of turbocharger showing part numbers →110). ▶ Before starting work, carry out visual inspection of working area. ▶ Remove any obstacles and objects lying around. ▶ Before start-up / commissioning, check all pipes from and to tur- bocharger for damage and leaks. ▶ Don't work in any way that could impair safety when working on tur- bocharger. ▶ After about every 12 hours of operation or at least once a day, inspect turbocharger for visible damage and defects. ▶ Immediately report any damage or changes in operational perform- ance to person responsible. ▶ If damage is discovered, immediately shut down turbocharger and se- cure it against inadvertent or unauthorized use. ▶ When switching on auxiliary power sources (hydraulics, pneumatics, electricity, water), keep an eye open for any hazards resulting from supplying these power sources. Safety during cleaning If cleaning agents or solvents are used for cleaning, the corresponding material safety data sheet and the safety instructions in section "Haz- ards due to operating and auxiliary materials" must be observed. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet for the cleaning agent or solvent. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.6 Safe operation and maintenance ▶ Inspect the electric cables for abrasion and damage before and after your cleaning work. Safety during disassembly, assembly, maintenance and troubleshooting ▶ Always perform the specified adjustments, servicing as well as in- spection work and observe inspection intervals. ▶ Inform operating personnel about all service and repair work before beginning. ▶ Before opening a cover or removing a protective device on a tur- bocharger, the engine must be switched off and the turbocharger must have come to a standstill. ▶ Ensure that the supply of oil is interrupted, especially with an external oil supply. ▶ Put the engine into operation only after all parts have been refitted properly. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Mechanical work on the turbocharger Possible damage to or destruction of components on the turbocharger. ▶ Perform only those tasks that are described in this manual. ▶ Perform work only for which training has been carried out. Safety when taking out of operation or preparing for mothballing ▶ Secure the rotor so it cannot turn. The rotor can turn on its own from the force of the stack draught. ▶ Clean the turbocharger before mothballing it. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet for the cleaning and moth- balling agents. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance Mechanical hazards during operation During normal operation, no mechanical hazards emanate from the tur- bocharger if it has been installed properly. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Risk of injury Contact with rotating parts can lead to serious injuries. The turbochar- ger must never be operated without a filter silencer or an air suction branch. When the engine is at a standstill, the rotor can turn on its own because of stack draught. ▶ Operate the turbocharger in accordance with instructions. ▶ During maintenance work, secure the rotor against unintentional ro- tation. Mechanical hazards when working on the turbocharger During maintenance work, various risks can occur through the improper handling of components, through the non-observance of work instruc- tions, due to inadequate care or as a consequence of insufficient train- ing. WARNING Mechanical hazard Severe injuries to personnel or fatal accidents can be caused by mech- anical influences as a consequence of hazardous and inadequate opera- tional procedures. ▶ Observe the general rules for occupational safety and prevention of accidents. ▶ Ensure workplace safety. ▶ Only perform operations that are described in this chapter. ▶ Only perform operations for which you have previously received in- struction or training. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance Hazards due to noise The development of noise during operation is influenced by the installa- tion and operating conditions. Noise with a sound pressure level exceed- ing 85 dB(A) is harmful. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hazards due to noise Noise can cause impaired hearing, damage to health, mental disturb- ances, diminished attention and irritation. ▶ Always wear ear protection when the engine is running. ▶ When the sound pressure level is above 85 dB(A), always wear ear protection. Wear ear protection. Hazards due to hot surfaces and substances During operation, turbocharger surfaces and attached parts as well as operating materials (lubricating oil) become hot. The surface temperat- ure is dependent on the effectiveness of the insulation being used. The temperature can become high enough so that it falls into ranges where burns are possible. WARNING Risk of burning Touching hot surfaces or contact with hot operating materials can lead to serious burns. ▶ Do not touch hot surfaces and heed the warning plate on the tur- bocharger. ▶ Wear heat-resistant safety gloves and protective clothing. ▶ Allow the turbocharger to cool down before carrying out any work. Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hot surfaces on uninsulated turbochargers Uninsulated turbochargers can cause serious personal injuries (burns). The turbocharger is supplied with or without insulation in accordance with the purchase order received from the enginebuilder. If supply is without insulation, the enginebuilder is responsible for providing the turbocharger with proper insulation and for providing protection against contact with hot surfaces. ▶ Compliance with the instructions and specifications given by the en- ginebuilder to protect against hot turbocharger surfaces is compuls- ory. Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. Hazards due to operating and auxiliary materials Operating and auxiliary materials are substances used for operation or the execution of maintenance work. Oils, greases, coolants, cleaning agents and solvents, acids, etc. can be regarded as hazardous materials. Operating and auxiliary materials can be combustible and easily ignited. WARNING Handling operating and auxiliary materials Ingestion or inhalation of vapours of operating and auxiliary materials or contact with such can cause damage to health. ▶ Avoid inhalation and contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure good ventilation. ▶ Observe details in the safety data sheets of the operating and auxili- ary materials. ▶ Observe local laws. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Risk of fire, explosion Flammable and combustible operating materials and supplies can catch fire or resulting vapours can lead to an explosion. ▶ Observe the details in the material safety data sheets of the operat- ing and auxiliary materials. ▶ Comply with local legislation. ▶ Do not allow any exposed flame or ignition source during cleaning work. ▶ Carry out cleaning in the open or provide sufficient aeration and ventilation. CAUTION Risk of environmental damage The escape of operating and auxiliary materials into the atmosphere or contamination of the ground and water due to improper disposal can lead to environmental damage. ▶ Handle operating and auxiliary materials carefully. ▶ Heed the instructions for use, safety data sheets and hazard notices on the containers of the operating and auxiliary materials. ▶ Wear appropriate protective clothing. ▶ Avoid inhalation and contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure that the work space is adequately ventilated. ▶ Seal containers tightly immediately after use and put them away. ▶ Collect used working and auxiliary materials safely, store them separ- ately in suitable containers and dispose of them properly and in an environmentally compatible manner in accordance with statutory reg- ulations. ▶ In the event of leaks or after spilling, immediately spread a suitable binding agent and dispose of it properly and in an environmentally compatible manner in accordance with statutory regulations. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.7 Hazards during operation and maintenance Hazards when handling insulating materials © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hazards due to insulating materials Dust and fibres from insulating materials can cause damage to health or irritations. Unsuitable, combustible insulating materials signify a fire hazard. ▶ Use only suitable, non-combustible insulating materials. ▶ Ensure that the work area is well ventilated. ▶ Avoid stirring up dust. ▶ Use tools and processes which keep dust to a minimum. ▶ Remove packing materials only in the work area. ▶ Take particular care when removing old insulating materials. ▶ Dispose of insulating materials properly and in an environmentally compatible way in accordance with applicable local regulations. Wear safety goggles. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against dusts. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. ▶ Use only suitable, non-combustible insulating materials. ▶ Ensure that the work area is well ventilated. ▶ Wear suitable work clothing (safety glasses, respiratory mask). ▶ Avoid stirring up dust. ▶ Use tools and processes which keep dust to a minimum. ▶ Remove packing materials only in the work area. ▶ Take particular care when removing old insulating materials. ▶ Dispose of insulating materials properly and in an environmentally compatible way in accordance with applicable local regulations. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.8 Deflagration on gas engines Hazards due to electrical components © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hazards due to electrical components Electrical components operate with voltages which can present hazards to humans. ▶ All work on or with electrical components may only be performed by trained specialists. ▶ Heed any country-specific regulations. 2.8 Deflagration on gas engines ABB turbochargers can withstand a deflagration with a transient pres- sure increase of 12 bar. ABB Turbocharging recommends that, following a deflagration event, the turbocharger undergoes an inspection of the following points: ▪ Position of the turbine and compressor casings to the bearing casing ▪ Shifting of the bearing casing in relation to the bracket ▪ Cracks in casings If during external inspection anomalies are found or if a particularly strong deflagration event has taken place, it is also recommended to check the bearings of the turbochargers before the next start. This in- spection and evaluation must be carried out by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.9 Periodic checking of the pressure vessel 2.9 Periodic checking of the pressure vessel The pressure vessels used by ABB, such as those for wet or dry cleaning, are so-called "simple pressure vessels". ▪ The locally applicable legal regulations regarding periodic checks of the pressure vessels must be observed. ▪ The operating company is responsible for the safe operation of the pressure vessel. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Danger due to pressure vessels The operating company must make sure the pressure vessels are in proper working condition and monitor them. Necessary repair or main- tenance work must be carried out without delay and the required safety precautions must be taken. ▶ Pressure equipment must not be operated if it has defects. 2.10 Lifting loads WARNING Suspended loads Loads not suspended in compliance with regulations may lead to per- sonal injury or accidents with fatal consequences. ▶ Loads must always be fastened to technically perfect lifting gear with sufficient loading capacity. ▶ Make sure the load is suspended properly on the crane hook. ▶ Do not let anyone stand beneath a suspended load. Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. Wear safety helmet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 2 Safety / 2.10 Lifting loads © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 In the case of two or more suspension points, the slinging angle must not exceed 45°. This avoids excessive loading due to inclined tensile loading. ▶ Fasten turbocharger assemblies / components as described in re- spective handling steps. ▶ Before attaching slings, allow turbocharger components to cool down (maximum 80°C). ▶ Use suitable protection at sharp edges. ▶ Completely screw in assembly / fitting devices without fail so that they cannot work loose during use. ▶ Use assembly / fitting devices only for applications described. ▶ Make sure removed turbocharger components stand safely and se- curely. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.1 Oil supply 3 Start-up 3.1 Oil supply A carefully designed and installed oil supply, which functions in all pos- sible operational conditions, is an important prerequisite for trouble- free turbocharger operation. The turbocharger is normally lubricated with oil from the engine oil cir- cuit. If a separate lubricating system is used, then emergency lubrication is also to be provided. ▶ Heed the instructions of the engine builder when selecting the lubric- ating oil and oil-change intervals. Oil filtration © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Depending on the turbine specifications and bearings used, varying amounts of contaminants have to be filtered out of the lubricating oil to avoid dangerous wear of the bearing parts. The standard oil filter specification for the turbocharger is 34 μm. This means that contaminants larger than 0.034 mm must be filtered out of the oil with a separation efficiency > 99%. ▶ Fit an accessory filter if engine oil filter is not efficient enough. ▶ If the engine is started cold and the flow resistance rises to above 0.5 bar due to deposits of dirt in the accessory filter, a bypass must open which ensures that oil flows to the turbocharger by circumventing the filter. ▶ Check that oil filters are clean before commissioning. NOTICE Also follow the enginebuilder's instructions regarding filter mesh and separation efficiency. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.1 Oil supply Lubricant © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE All lubricating oils used for engines are admissible. Oil inlet viscosity and temperature The oil-inlet temperature must not exceed 105°C. Permissible oil-inlet viscosities and oil-inlet temperatures are shown in the following chart. CAUTION Falling below the minimum oil inlet temperature Serious machine or property damage can be caused by excessively high oil viscosity and the resulting lack of oil in the bearings. ▶ Do not allow the oil inlet temperature to fall below the minimum 30 oC when starting the engine. ▶ The oil inlet temperature must never be less than 10 °C. 1) Kinematic viscosity (mm2/s = cSt) 2) Oil-inlet temperature (°C) A Permissible range Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.1 Oil supply Oil pressure The oil pressure in front of the turbocharger must be maintained pre- cisely to ensure trouble-free operation. Status for operation Oil pressure in front of turbocharger [bar] Normal operation 2.0 ... 4.5 Engine start: cold oil, permissible for maximum 15 minutes ≤ 8.0 Engine idling ≥ 0.2 Pre- and post-lubrication (engine stopped) ≤ 1.0 © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Prelubrication Serious machine or property damage might result if the turbocharger is not supplied with oil when the engine is starting. ▶ Activate prelubrication device before starting engine. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.1 Oil supply Lubricating oil temperature at the inlet © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Machine damage Machine damage may result if the oil temperature at the oil inlet ex- ceeds the permissible range. ▶ Keep the oil temperature at the oil inlet as specified in the following table. Status for operation Oil temperature at the in- let Toil,inlet Admissible 30 ... 105 °C Temporarily admissible (< 1 h) → alarm > 105 °C Not admissible → stop engine > 110 °C Not admissible → do not start engine (before starting: preheat oil) < 30 °C Lubricating oil temperature at the outlet The oil temperature at the outlet depends mainly on: ▪ lubricating oil temperature and pressure at the oil inlet ▪ engine load and turbocharger speed ▪ exhaust gas temperature The maximum permissible oil temperature at the outlet is listed in the following table. The specified oil outlet temperature must be regarded as an alarm value for turbocharger operation and be monitored in ac- cordance with standard regulations. Status for operation Oil temperature at outlet Toil,outlet Admissible ≤ 160 °C Temporarily admissible → alarm > 160 °C Not admissible → stop engine > 180 °C Admissible ≤ Toil,inlet + 55 K Temporarily admissible → alarm > Toil,inlet + 55 K If the turbocharger has been operated outside the permissible range for a prolonged period of time, ABB Turbocharging recommends having the turbocharger inspected by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.2 Inspection work 3.2 Inspection work Inspection work includes preventive visual controls plus monitoring and measuring work before and during commissioning. Inspections help de- tect changes to the turbocharger. Machine damage can be avoided. 3.2.1 Inspection before commissioning Monitoring devices ▶ Check for correct functioning. Filter mat ▶ Inspect for damage. Lubricating system ▶ Check oil filter for cleanliness before commissioning. CAUTION Prelubrication Serious machine or property damage might result if the turbocharger is not supplied with oil when the engine is starting. ▶ Activate prelubrication device before starting engine. Warning plates on tur- bocharger ▶ Check whether the warning plates are present and legible. ▶ Check whether the protective sheets have been removed. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Contaminated oil Particles of dirt and solid matter in the oil can cause serious damage to the machine or property. ▶ During initial commissioning and after all service work, the complete lubricating system must be flushed thoroughly with warm oil. ▶ When running in the engine and after all service work on the lubricat- ing system, special running-in filters must be used. ▶ Check oil pressure in oil supply lines. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.2 Inspection work 3.2.2 Check after start-up (engine at idling speed) Lubricating system ▶ Check oil pressure in oil supply lines. ▶ Check oil inlet temperature. The permissible values are listed in the section Oil supply. Gas, air and oil lines ▶ Check all gas, air and oil lines for leaks after starting the engine. 3.2.3 Check when running up engine ▶ Measure speed, oil pressure and charging pressure at various engine performance levels. ▶ Measure exhaust gas temperature in front of and behind turbine. ▶ Measure air temperature in front of and behind compressor. The measured values must be compared with the values in the accept- ance test report, while taking different operating conditions into ac- count. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Lubricants and pastes used during assembly of the turbocharger li- quefy or vaporise and might escape as an oily liquid in the first few hours after commissioning. If oily liquid continues to escape after this period, an oil leak must be suspected. The first step is to check for leak- age of the oil supply to the turbocharger. If this is leaky, contact an offi- cial ABB Turbocharging service station. 3.2.4 Inspection after 100 service hours Clean or replace lubricating oil filters after the first 100 service hours. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 3 Start-up / 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation 3.3 Commissioning after taking out of operation If provided ▶ Remove cover plates (blind flanges) between compressor casing out- let and charge air duct, before gas inlet and after gas outlet. ▶ Inspect exhaust gas duct / line in front of and after turbine for any combustion deposits, foreign matter or residual water. Clean and re- move. ▶ Inspect air supply line or filter silencer for any foreign matter. Clean and remove. ▶ Start up turbocharger oil circulation system at engine end. ▶ Prepare turbocharger for operation as instructed in section "Inspec- tion work before start-up / commissioning" of chapter headed "Start- up / commissioning". ▶ Start up turbocharger. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.1 Noise emissions 4 Operation 4.1 Noise emissions © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hazards due to noise Noise can cause impaired hearing, damage to health, mental disturb- ances, diminished attention and irritation. ▶ Always wear ear protection when the engine is running. ▶ When the sound pressure level is above 85 dB(A), always wear ear protection. Wear ear protection. The sound pressure level (A-weighted) of emissions is measured at a dis- tance of 1 metre from the turbocharger. The highest sound pressure level of emissions1) reaches a maximum of 105 dB(A) near the filter silencer and over the entire speed range. The following prerequisites must be fulfilled on the turbocharger in or- der to observe this limit value: ▪ Fitted air-inlet system ▪ All standard, noise-reducing measures have been taken2). ▪ The bellows at the air outlet have been perfectly insulated acoustic- ally by the engine builder. He is also responsible for insulating the charge air / scavenging air line and the charge air cooler. 1) Directive 2006/42/EC, 1.7.4.2 / u / Paragraphs 5 + 7 : A-weighted emission sound pressure level 2) In the event of divergent insulation designs, the engine builder must ensure that equivalent acoustic insulating measures are taken. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.2 Servicing work Suggestion for noise insulation of the bellows © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 01 Compressor casing 04 Insulation pads 02 Bellows 05 Insulation mat (at least 15 mm) 03 Charge air duct / scavenging air line 06 Sheet metal cover 4.2 Servicing work Service work to be carried out during operation involves visual checks, monitoring, measuring, inspection work and functional checks. It is then possible for changes to the turbocharger to be identified and rectified. In this way, it can be ensured that the turbocharger remains in full work- ing order. CAUTION Service intervals Service work on the turbocharger that is neglected or carried out too late can lead to excessive contamination and wear as well as operating failures. ▶ Carry out service work at specified time intervals. CAUTION Shortened service intervals Despite observance of the service intervals, unusual loads, such as sev- eral start-stops a day, harsh environmental factors, poor fuel quality or heavy installation vibration can lead to premature machine damage. ▶ A shortened service interval must be arranged with ABB Turbochar- ging. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.2 Servicing work © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Unknown changes during operation The consequences can range from an impairment to a breakdown. ▶ Have unknown causes clarified by an ABB Turbocharging service sta- tion. 4.2.2 Servicing work according to the engine manufacturer's instructions Oil filter ▶ Clean or replace oil filter in supply line to turbocharger when engine is not running. NOTICE Service inspection after 5 years To prevent age- and stoppage-related machine damage, an inspection by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station is recommended at the latest 5 years after the last service. 4.2.1 Service work every 25 ... 50 hours ▶ Visual inspection for air, exhaust gas, water and oil leaks. ▶ Record operating data and enter it in the engine logbook. ▶ Clarify the cause of any variances. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.2 Servicing work 4.2.3 Service work in accordance with instructions on rating plate (In general, after 8000 ... 16000 hours of operation) Rotor and bearing parts must be inspected and assessed by an ABB Tur- bocharging Service Station. The following work can be carried in prepar- ation. ▶ Remove cartridge group as described in chapter Disassembly and as- sembly. ▶ Measure clearances. ▶ Clean turbine and compressor casings and check them for cracks and erosion / corrosion. ▶ Clean bearing casing and blow air through oil ports / holes. ▶ Clean nozzle ring and check for cracks and erosion. 4.2.4 Entries in engine logbook By monitoring the engine, conclusions can be drawn about the tur- bocharger performance. The following operating data and measured values must be entered reg- ularly in the engine manufacturer's engine logbook: ▪ Engine performance and speed ▪ Air intake temperature ▪ Exhaust gas temperature in front of and behind the turbine ▪ Pressure of charge air ▪ Pressure drop in charge air cooler ▪ Lubricating oil pressure and lubricating oil temperature If provided ▪ Air temperature behind compressor and charge air cooler ▪ Turbocharger speed ▪ Pressure loss in air filter © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.3 Expected exchange intervals 4.3 Expected exchange intervals Rotating components The recommended replacement intervals for compressor wheels and tur- bine wheels are defined depending on the operating conditions and based on the safety concept (SiKo) for rotating parts. These intervals can be found on the turbocharger rating plate. Non-rotating components Depending on the system-specific operating conditions, a distinction is made between: ▪ the replacement interval for the bearing parts and ▪ the replacement interval for those non-rotating components that are exposed to hot gases. Decisive in this respect are various influencing parameters, which can drastically shorten the replacement intervals of these parts in extreme cases. During the specified periodic service work, the individual components are inspected for wear and, if necessary, replaced. Expected replacement intervals [h] GAS / MDO HFO Turbine casing 25000 ... 50000 25000 ... 50000 Nozzle ring 50000 10000 ... 25000 Gas outlet flange 50000 35000 ... 50000 Partition wall 50000 35000 ... 50000 Rotor components See rating plate information Bearing parts 12000 ... 32000 12000 ... 24000 Other casings 50000 50000 GAS = Natural gas MDO = Marine diesel oil HFO = Heavy fuel oil The specified values are a guide only and not guaranteed (see following section Influencing parameters). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.3 Expected exchange intervals Influencing parameters The specified values are only guide values and not guaranteed. The ac- tual values can deviate considerably from the guide values due, for ex- ample, to the following influences: ▪ Fuel quality and preparation ▪ Load profile (thermal load cycles, also starts / stops, emergency shut-downs) ▪ Gas inlet temperature ▪ Frequency and execution of turbine and compressor cleaning ▪ Turbocharger specification ▪ System-specific operating conditions (operating point, combustion quality, composition of exhaust gas) For bearing parts ▪ Lubricating oil quality (oil filtration, condition of lubricating oil, oil monitoring) ▪ Load profile (rpm / speed, pressure conditions, temperature) ▪ State of rotor unbalance (degree of contamination) © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.4 Speed measurement 4.4 Speed measurement A speed measuring system permits continuous monitoring of the tur- bocharger speed. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Do not use cables as a climbing aid If you pull the speed measurement cables too hard, contacts can be pulled out. ▶ Do not tension the speed measurement cables. 86505(A)Speed sensor (cable not integ- rated) 86526F/I converter 86505(B)Speed sensor (cable integrated) 86528Tachometer 86515(A)Cable connector to 86505(A) 01Screw plug 86515(B)Cable connector to 86505(B) 02Gasket Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.4 Speed measurement 4.4.1 Speed differences with multiple turbochargers per engine The speeds of all turbochargers on one engine differ only slightly from each other in normal operation. The difference between the highest and the lowest turbocharger speed must not be more than 3 % relative to the speed limit nBmax. If this permissible range of difference is exceeded, the following steps must be carried out: ▶ Reduce engine performance immediately until the highest turbochar- ger speed no longer exceeds 70% of nBmax. ▶ If the engine cannot be stopped, continue to run at this reduced en- gine performance or turbocharger speed. ▶ If the turbocharger surges continuously, engine performance must be reduced further. ▶ Measure the temperatures in the air and gas lines to and from the tur- bochargers and compare them with standard values. If the engine can be stopped for a short time: ▶ Inspect the air and gas lines as well as the turbocharger and eliminate any problems. ▶ In any event, it is recommended that you contact the nearest ABB Tur- bocharging Service Station. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.4 Speed measurement 4.4.2 Replacing the speed sensor © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Hot cable connector and hot speed sensor Risk of burning. During operation, the cable connector and the speed sensor can reach temperatures exceeding 100 °C. ▶ Wear safety gloves when removing the cable connector and speed sensor. Wear safety gloves to protect against thermal hazards. ▶ Reduce engine performance to the idling speed, then stop the engine. ▶ Switch off the lubricating oil supply to the turbocharger. ▶ Disconnect the cable connector from the speed sensor. ▶ Screw out defective speed sensor. ▶ Screw in a new speed sensor up to the limit block. ▶ Adhere to tightening torque.

Part num- ber TPS44 TPS48 TPS52 TPS57 TPS61

86505 15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm 15 Nm Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 4 Operation / 4.5 Stopping the engine © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Sealing of the speed sensor The speed sensor is designed with a sealing lip and does not require any additional gasket for assembly. ▶ Connect cable connector to speed sensor. ▶ Switch on lubricating oil supply to turbocharger. 4.4.3 Failure of speed measuring system Possible reasons for failure of the speed measuring system are de- scribed in the chapter Troubleshooting. 4.5 Stopping the engine CAUTION Stopping the engine of oil-cooled turbocharger version Heat in the turbocharger must be dissipated by the further circulating lubricating oil. ▶ Post-lubricate for 15 ... 20 minutes. ▶ Maintain oil pressure of 0.5 ... 1.0 bar for post-lubrication. CAUTION Stopping the engine of water-cooled turbocharger version Heat in the turbocharger must be dissipated. ▶ Allow turbocharger cooling water to run for 15 ... 20 minutes after stopping engine. ▶ Allow oil lubrication to continue running until rotor comes to a stop. Further post-lubrication is not required and not recommended. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.1 Foreword to Maintenance 5 Maintenance 5.1 Foreword to Maintenance General maintenance work involves regular visual checks and cleaning tasks which are intended to ensure the trouble-free functioning of the turbocharger. The maintenance points described here are differentiated as follows: ▪ Cleaning during operation: – Compressor – Turbine and nozzle ring. ▪ Mechanical cleaning of individual components: – Filter silencer – Casings, diffuser, nozzle ring – Cartridge group: Compressor, turbine © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Risk of damage during mechanical cleaning If mechanical cleaning is carried out too often, this can lead to damage and corrosion on the components. ▶ If cleaning during operation is not sufficient to achieve acceptable values regarding thermal load and engine performance, mechanical cleaning of certain spots can be carried out. ▶ Perform mechanical cleaning, especially of the cartridge group, only once within the service interval. To allow you to observe the standard service intervals and to maintain a high turbocharger efficiency, ABB Turbocharging recommends that the cleaning procedure be carried out during operation. This allows the thermal load of the engine to be kept low while ensuring maximum fuel efficiency. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agents in an environmentally compatible manner, professionally and in accordance with valid local regulations. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation General The contamination of the compressor stage (compressor wheel, wall in- sert and diffuser) depends on the degree of purity of the air that is drawn in. Deposits can form in the flow channels if salt, oil mist, exhaust gas or dust are sucked in with the air. Consequences of contamination: ▪ Impaired compressor efficiency ▪ Higher exhaust gas temperatures ▪ Increased fuel consumption ▪ Increased rotor unbalance Periodic cleaning of the compressor during operation prevents or delays any major increase in contamination. It does not, however, replace the regular service work, during which the turbocharger is completely dis- mantled and the compressor is cleaned mechanically. NOTICE If the coating of dirt is very thick and hard, the compressor can only be cleaned manually when disassembled. This cleaning must be carried out by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Cleaning interval The interval between periodic cleaning is very dependent on the operat- ing conditions. In general, cleaning should be carried out every 25 ... 100 operating hours. Should the specified cleaning intervals prove incompatible with engine operation, please contact ABB Turbocharging. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation Cleaning method Cleaning the compressor while in operation is carried out as wet clean- ing. This cleaning method is tested and approved by ABB Turbocharging. Principle of wet cleaning To clean the compressor stage during operation, water is injected in front of the compressor wheel through an injection pipe fitted in the fil- ter silencer or the suction branch. The water does not act as a solvent, but the contamination deposit is re- moved by the mechanical impact of the droplets. This is a very suitable process, provided that the degree of contamination is not too high. CAUTION The injection pipe must on no account be connected directly via a cock to a water pipe or a dosing vessel larger than the one supplied. This prevents uncontrolled volumes of water entering the turbocharger and engine, which can lead to serious damage. V-engines In the case of V-engines with several turbochargers on each engine, we recommend parallel cleaning of the compressors. This cleaning process is faster and the risk of turbocharger surging is reduced. Sequential charging In the case of sequential charging, care must be taken to ensure that tur- bocharger compressors are cleaned regularly, especially after periods of operation in the lower performance range. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Corrosion and deposits when cleaning Damage and impairment of turbocharger parts due to salt water and cooling water additives ▶ Don't use salt water for cleaning, but only clean fresh water. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation 5.2.1 Wet cleaning compressor using external water pressure vessel (XC1) Approval by enginebuilder These instructions for wet cleaning only apply when cleaning is carried out with clean water and under the precondition that the enginebuilder approves the process. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Supplying water from the externally mounted water vessel is suitable only for those applications where a negative pressure exists in front of the compressor wheel (not used for: blowers connected in front of the compressor or high-pressure compressor stages with two-stage char- ging). Operating state prerequisites for cleaning compressor with XC1 NOTICE To be able to carry out a satisfactory cleaning process which has been tested and is recommended by ABB Turbocharging, the following pre- requisites must be fulfilled: ▶ Run engine at load from 50 ... 85 %. ▶ Start cleaning cycle according to following description Wet cleaning operation with XC1. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.2 Cleaning the compressor during operation Procedure for wet cleaning the compressor with XC1 XSealing plug DCompressed air YValve activator WWater ZVessel Operating the water pres- sure vessel ▶ Remove sealing plug (X). ▶ Fill the vessel (Z) with clean water. ▶ Screw in the sealing plug. ▶ Push the valve activator (Y) against the spring and hold for 10 to 15 seconds until the entire volume of water has been injected. ▶ Do not repeat the cleaning cycle until a stabilisation period of at least 10 minutes has elapsed. NOTICE Whether or not cleaning has been successful can be seen from the char- ging or flushing pressure and also from the exhaust gas temperatures. If the cleaning process is unsatisfactory, it can be repeated up to 2 times. If the cleaning result is still not satisfactory after three attempts and the engine values are also unsatisfactory, we recommend that you have the turbocharger inspected and cleaned by an official ABB Turbochar- ging Service Station. Cleaning parameters per turbocharger compressor Product Engine load Contents of cleaning me- dium vessel [dm3] Water injection time t1 [s] TPS 50 ... 85 % 0.4 10 © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation The combustion of fuels such as heavy fuel oil (HFO) in diesel engines produces contamination of the turbocharger's turbine components. In combination with a high exhaust gas temperature, poor quality fuel can lead to particularly hard deposits on the nozzle ring and especially on the gas outlet flange. ABB Turbocharging recommends the use of fuels with low ash, sulphur, sodium and vanadium contents. Consequences of contamination: ▪ Poor turbine efficiency ▪ elevated exhaust gas temperatures ▪ higher charging and ignition pressures as turbocharger speed rises ▪ lower engine performance. ▪ After stopping the engine, the rotor can become stuck in contamina- tion deposits. Experience with turbocharger operation shows that the intervals between overhauls can be extended if cleaning while in operation is car- ried out periodically. Wet cleaning the turbine, as described below, should be used for 4-stroke applications when there are heavy deposits from, for example, HFO. Under no circumstances is periodic cleaning of the turbine during opera- tion a substitute for the service work carried out when the turbocharger is completely dismantled and cleaned mechanically. Turbines which are very heavily contaminated cannot be cleaned this way any longer. In this case, the contaminated components must be mechanically cleaned by an ABB Turbocharging Service Station. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Regular cleaning Regular turbine cleaning during operation prevents or delays excessive build-up of contamination. Cleaning intervals The interval between periodic cleaning is very dependent on the operat- ing conditions. In general, cleaning should be carried out every 50 to 200 operating hours. NOTICE Cleaning intervals Should the specified cleaning intervals prove incompatible with engine operation, please contact ABB Turbocharging. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation Cleaning method Turbine components are cleaned during operation by using the wet cleaning method described below. This cleaning method is tested and approved by ABB Turbocharging. The turbine casing design and the type of turbine casing seal are decis- ive for the choice of cleaning method. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Approval by engine manufacturer The prerequisite for wet cleaning is that the engine manufacturer ap- proves the method and his instructions are followed. 5.3.1 Wet cleaning methods Process with short water injection time (3 x 30 seconds cleaning) The cleaning process with short water injection time is used for tur- bocharger designs without additional sealing by means of C-rings. The process is based on the principle of thermal shock in combination with a subsequent flushing phase. Process with long water injection time (10 minutes cleaning) The cleaning process with a long water injection time is used for tur- bocharger designs with additional sealing by means of C-rings. Based on a 10-minute injection phase, this cleaning process utilises the water solubility of the dirty deposits. NOTICE Choice of cleaning method If you need information about the choice of cleaning method (short / long), you can contact the engine builder or an official ABB Turbochar- ger service station. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation 5.3.2 Prerequisites © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Risk of corrosion and deposits Impairment and damage of turbocharger by salt water and cooling wa- ter additives in flow ducts ▶ Don't use salt water for cleaning, but only clean fresh water. ▶ Avoid corrosion on casing inner surfaces. ▶ Let engine run for 10 minutes after wet cleaning. CAUTION Maximum temperature in front of turbine during cleaning When cleaning, the temperature in front of the turbine will rise and can heavily stress the material of turbine components. The temperature at the turbine inlet can be up to 100 °C higher than the exhaust gas tem- perature after the cylinder. This should be taken into consideration when setting the operating point before cleaning. ▶ Don't exceed maximum temperature in front of turbine when clean- ing. CAUTION Impermissible thermal stressing and flooding of the turbine Smaller volumes of water can result in poor cleaning. Larger volumes of water lead to impermissible thermal stressing of the turbine compon- ents and can cause flooding of the turbine. ▶ Be absolutely sure to observe turbine cleaning parameters. NOTICE V-engines In the case of V-engines with several turbochargers on each engine, we recommend parallel cleaning of both turbochargers. This cleaning pro- cess is faster and the risk of turbocharger surging is reduced. Recommended operating state for turbine wet cleaning The following operating state is tested and approved by ABB Turbochar- ging: Characteristic / com- ponent Conditions short Water injection time long Water injection time Engine load (guide value) 20 ... 40 % Turbine inlet temperature 350 ... 400 °C 350 ... 430 °C TTE before water injection Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation Characteristic / com- ponent Conditions short Water injection time long Water injection time Water supply ensured Water pressure (overpres- sure over atmosphere) pWT 2.0 bar 1.5 bar If necessary, engine performance must be reduced to maintain these conditions. The cleaning cycle can now be started based on the following descrip- tion. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation 5.3.3 Procedure for method with short water injection time > Prerequisites have been fulfilled. ▶ Wait 10 minutes during a stabilising phase after reducing the engine load. ▶ Open the shut-off valve. ▶ Set the required water flow rate as specified in the table of cleaning parameters using the flowmeter and inject for 30 seconds. ▶ Observe a pause of 3 or 5 minutes as specified in the table. ▶ Repeat the 30-second water injection two times. ▶ Close the shut-off valve. ▶ Wait 10 minutes during a stabilising phase before increasing engine load again. This completes the turbine cleaning process. Cleaning parameters during the process TPS Temperature in front of the tur- bine during clean- ing [°C] Water volume flow 1) [dm3/min] Injection time [min] Pause between injec- tions [min] 44 ≤ 450 4.5 0.5 3 48 6 (3 x) 52 8 57 11 61 17 5 1) mosphere) corresponds to a water pressure pWT of 2.0 bar (overpressure over at- © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Maximum temperature in front of turbine during cleaning When cleaning, the temperature in front of the turbine will rise and can heavily stress the material of turbine components. The temperature at the turbine inlet can be up to 100 °C higher than the exhaust gas tem- perature after the cylinder. This should be taken into consideration when setting the operating point before cleaning. ▶ Don't exceed maximum temperature in front of turbine when clean- ing. 5.3.4 Procedure for method with long water injection time > Prerequisites have been fulfilled. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.3 Turbine cleaning during operation ▶ Wait 10 minutes as a stabilising phase after reducing the engine load. ▶ Open the shut-off valve. ▶ Set the required water flow rate as specified in the table of cleaning parameters using a flowmeter and inject for 10 minutes. ▶ Close the shut-off valve. ▶ Wait 10 minutes as a stabilising phase before increasing the engine load again. This completes the turbine cleaning process. Cleaning parameters during the process TPS Temperature in front of the tur- bine during cleaning [°C] Water volume flow 1) [dm3/min] Injection time [min] Stabilising phase before / after wa- ter injection [min] 44 ≤ 530 2.5 10 10 48 4 52 5.5 57 8.5 61 12 1) mosphere) corresponds to a water pressure pWT of 1.5 bar (overpressure over at- © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Maximum temperature in front of turbine during cleaning When cleaning, the temperature in front of the turbine will rise and can heavily stress the material of turbine components. The temperature at the turbine inlet can be up to 100 °C higher than the exhaust gas tem- perature after the cylinder. This should be taken into consideration when setting the operating point before cleaning. ▶ Don't exceed maximum temperature in front of turbine when clean- ing. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4.1 Introduction © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Choosing cleaning tools Turbocharger components are sensitive to mechanical damage. The use of needle guns or other impact tools, for example, damages the components. Depending on the specification, nozzle rings and turbine casings have protective coatings, which can also be damaged. ▶ Only use soft tools such as cloths, brushes or wire brushes. ▶ In the event of heavy contamination, the cleaning methods that have been described such as soaking can be repeated until a satisfactory result has been achieved. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agents in an environmentally compatible manner, professionally and in accordance with valid local regulations. NOTICE Disassembly and assembly The disassembly and assembly of the components is described in chapter Disassembly and assembly. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4.2 Cleaning the filter silencer © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 NOTICE Disassembly and assembly The procedure for disassembly and assembly of the filter silencer is de- scribed in the chapter entitled Disassembly and Assembly. Cleaning the filter ring (if provided) ▶ Remove filter ring (81265). ▶ Clean filter ring (81265) as required or every 500 operating hours, and replace after the fifth cleaning operation at the latest. The degree of contamination of the filter ring depends on the cleanli- ness of the air that is drawn in. ▶ Wash filter ring (81265) using water containing light-duty detergent or, if very heavily contaminated, soak it while squeezing carefully. Rinse in cold water. Avoid rough handling (do not use a water jet). ▶ Allow the filter ring to dry out completely before assembly. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and gentle detergents in accordance with valid local regulations. Cleaning the absorption segments ▶ Loosen the tension bands (81270). ▶ Remove the cover grid (81266). 81135Filter silencer body 81266Cover grid 81136Absorption segment 81270Tension band 81137Sheet-metal covering 81271Lock 81265Filter ring Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically ▶ Pull out the sheet-metal coverings (81137), bend them up and remove the absorption segments (81136). ▶ Clean the absorption segments (81136). During cleaning, ensure that the absorption segments (81136) are only cleaned with a mild jet of compressed air, soft brush or a damp cloth. ▶ Have absorption segments which are heavily contaminated replaced by an official ABB Turbocharging Service Station. Fitting the filter silencer ▶ Insert the absorption segments (81136) into the sheet-metal cover- ings (81137). ▶ Bend the sheet-metal coverings (81137) back into their original shape and insert them into the slot guides in the silencer body (81135). ▶ Fit the cover grid (81266). ▶ Fit the tension bands (81270) and apply tension at the locks (81271). ▶ Damaged tension bands must be replaced with new ones. ▶ If provided, fit the filter ring (81265). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4.3 Compressor-end, non-rotating parts © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Handling operating materials and supplies Swallowing or inhaling vapours of operating materials and supplies or contact with them may be harmful to health. ▶ Do not breathe in these substances and avoid contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure proper ventilation. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the op- erating materials and supplies. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. The following performance-relevant parts can be cleaned according to the following description. 72000 Compressor casing 77000 Wall insert 79000 Diffuser ▶ Clean the components specified above with steam or allow to soak in diesel oil or water with household detergent. After soaking, remove the dirt with a brush. ▶ Dry components completely. ▶ Spray cleaned surfaces with penetrating oil. Do not spray the outer surfaces of the turbocharger. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agent in accordance with the spe- cifications in the safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4.4 Turbine-end, non-rotating parts © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Handling operating materials and supplies Swallowing or inhaling vapours of operating materials and supplies or contact with them may be harmful to health. ▶ Do not breathe in these substances and avoid contact with the skin. ▶ Ensure proper ventilation. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet for the op- erating materials and supplies. ▶ Wear personal protective equipment (PPE) according to the material safety data sheet. ▶ Comply with local legislation. Wear safety goggles. Wear safety gloves to protect against chemical hazards. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against gases. Baked-on layers of contamination, for example from heavy fuel oil or coked oil, occur at the turbine end. The following performance-relevant parts can be cleaned according to the following description. 51000 Turbine casing 56001 Nozzle ring 52400 Gas outlet flange ▶ Place contaminated parts in hot water or in a liquid such as brake cleaner, so that the contamination softens. ▶ Brush off the contamination or remove it with a steam cleaner. ▶ Repeat the soaking and brushing if necessary. ▶ Completely remove any solvents from the parts in clean water. ▶ Dry components completely. ▶ Spray cleaned surfaces with penetrating oil. Do not spray the outer surfaces of the turbocharger. ▶ Dispose of contaminated water and cleaning agent in accordance with the specifications in the safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically 5.4.5 Cartridge group Introduction © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Corrosion If the cartridge group is not put into operation again immediately after cleaning, parts may corrode. ▶ Re-install and use the cartridge group immediately after cleaning. Compressor wheels or turbines may be heavily contaminated due to ex- haust gas deposits or coked oil. Such contamination may possibly no longer be removed through cleaning during operation and must be cleaned mechanically during the standard service intervals (see chapter entitled Service work). ▶ Remove turbocharger from the engine (see chapter Removal and in- stallation →74). ▶ Remove cartridge group (see chapter Disassembly and assembly →78). First clean the compressor end and then the turbine end in accordance with the following description. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically Cleaning the compressor end © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Selection of the cleaning agent Cleaning agents that contain chlorine corrode metals. ▶ Only use pH-neutral cleaning agents that do not corrode metals. ▶ Observe the material safety data sheet. ▶ Observe country-specific regulations regarding banned and restric- ted substances. CAUTION Water and contamination in the cartridge group If water or contamination penetrates the cartridge group, this can im- pair the function of the turbocharger and damage parts inside the cart- ridge group. ▶ Make sure that no water or contamination can enter into the cart- ridge group. ▶ Clean compressor wheel with a cloth or soft brush soaked in water with household detergent. Do not use any wire brushes! ▶ Dry the compressor wheel and the gap between the compressor and the bearing casing with a weak jet of compressed air. ▶ Lightly spray the compressor wheel and the gap between the com- pressor and the bearing casing with penetrating oil. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agent in accordance with the safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically Cleaning the turbine end Soaking the dirt Baked-on layers of dirt from heavy fuel oil or coked oil, occur at the tur- bine end. The contamination can be removed by soaking and brushing. The soaking of the layers of dirt as well as the cleaning of the turbine are described below. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Product A [mm] B [mm] C [mm] TPS44 91 15 173 TPS48 108 17 205 TPS52 128 20 245 TPS57 157 25 300 TPS61 187 30 357 To soak the layers of dirt on the turbine, the cartridge group can be sub- merged vertically in a tank (02) with liquid. ▶ Place the tank (02) in a larger container (03), so that the excess liquid can be collected. CAUTION Selection of the cleaning agent Cleaning agents which contain chlorine attack metals. ▶ Use only pH-neutral cleaning agents which do not attack metals. ▶ Observe safety data sheet. ▶ Fill the tank (02) with soaking liquid. NOTICE Heat the liquid To shorten the soaking time the liquid can be heated to maximum 60 oC. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Heating up of cleaning agents and operating fluids When cleaning agents or operating fluids are heated up, explosive va- pours can be produced which are hazardous to health. ▶ Observe the information in the material safety data sheet. Wear a respiratory mask according to material safety data sheet. CAUTION Water and dirt in the cartridge group If water or dirt gets into the cartridge group, the turbocharger function may be impaired and parts in the cartridge group may be damaged. ▶ Place the cartridge group on suitable wooden or metal supports (01). ▶ Maintain dimension (B) for the supports (01), so that the cartridge group does not submerge too deep. ▶ Allow the layers of dirt on the turbine to soak for four hours. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically Removing the dirt © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 WARNING Health hazard due to soot particles If soot particles enter the eyes or respiratory tract, this can be harmful to health. ▶ Avoid the formation of dust. ▶ Vacuum up dust with a suitable vacuum cleaner. ▶ Wear a respiratory mask to protect against particles (P1 or P2 mask). ▶ Wear safety goggles. Wear safety goggles. Wear a respiratory mask to protect against dusts. Wear safety gloves to protect against mechanical hazards. ▶ Raise the cartridge group and align horizontally. ▶ Remove dirt manually with a soft brush or wire brush. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 5 Maintenance / 5.4 Cleaning components mechanically © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Water and dirt in the cartridge group If water or dirt gets into the cartridge group, the turbocharger function may be impaired and parts in the cartridge group may be damaged. ▶ Make sure that water or dirt does not get into the gap between the partition wall and turbine. CAUTION Non-permissible rotor unbalance after cleaning Unevenly distributed residual contamination deposits lead to rotor un- balance. This can result in bearing or turbocharger damage. ▶ Remove all traces of contamination from the turbine. ▶ After brushing off the contamination, fill the tank (02) with clean wa- ter, not salt water. ▶ Submerge the turbine of the cartridge group in clean water, so that loose particles of dirt detach completely. ▶ Raise the cartridge group and align horizontally. ▶ Clamp the partition wall with the bearing casing. ▶ Dry the turbine and the gap between the turbine and partition wall with a weak jet of compressed air. ▶ Lightly spray the turbine and the gap between the turbine and parti- tion wall with penetrating oil. ▶ Dispose of dirty water and cleaning agent in accordance with the spe- cifications in the safety data sheet. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.1 Malfunctions when starting 6 Troubleshooting 6.1 Malfunctions when starting Sluggish start-up Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Turbocharger contaminated Clean it Damaged bearing Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Rubbing rotor Foreign object in turbocharger Vibrations Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Rotor unbalance Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Damaged turbine or com- pressor Damaged bearing Rubbing of rotating parts Normal behaviour, no malfunction Turbochar- ger Minor uniform wear around the periphery of rotor components, caused by slight local rubbing of adjacent components, is per- missible. The compressor blades and turbine blades are then shortened somewhat. Certain tolerances must be observed to avoid a significant loss of efficiency. ▪ If there is any doubt about the extent of rubbing, then an ABB Turbocharging Service Station must be contacted. ▪ Have a dimension check carried out by an ABB Turbochar- ging Service Station. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.2 Surging of the turbocharger 6.2 Surging of the turbocharger Turbocharger surging Possible causes Elimination Engine Guard in front of the tur- bocharger is contaminated or damaged Clean / replace it Turbocharger Filter silencer or diffuser contaminated Clean it Heavy deposits of dirt in the turbine or nozzle ring Charge air cooler Cooler contaminated Clean it Charge air duct blocked © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Prolonged or periodic surging Possible damage to components, such as the compressor wheel, tur- bine blades, bearings and filter silencer ▶ Have the cause clarified immediately by an ABB Turbocharging ser- vice station and rectified. ▶ Have components inspected for damage and, if necessary, replaced by an ABB Turbocharging service station. Sporadic surge blows Surging of the turbocharger can occur during certain operating condi- tions such as when reducing the engine performance quickly when man- oeuvring. At the same time, the flow direction in the compressor is mo- mentarily reversed. Such sporadic surge blows do not impair the safe operation of the turbocharger. ▪ A surge blow is accompanied by a loud bang and escape of hot air from the filter silencer. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.3 Malfunctions during operation 6.3 Malfunctions during operation Lubricating oil pressure too low Possible causes Elimination Engine Oil filter heavily contaminated Clean it Defective oil pump in lubricat- Check / replace it ing system Manometer display wrong Replace the manometer Turbochar- ger Rotor axial clearance too large Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Reduction in speed Possible causes Elimination Engine Defects of connected cylinders Contact the enginebuilder when pulse charging Turbochar- ger Heavy contamination of the turbine Clean it Damaged rotor components or Contact an ABB Turbocharging bearing Service Station Pipes Defects such as leaks in the ex- haust gas pipes or charge air ducts Make repairs Increase in speed Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- Heavily contaminated nozzle Contact an ABB Turbocharging ger ring (with 4-stroke application) Service Station © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.3 Malfunctions during operation Exhaust gas temperature too high Engine performance and engine speed unchanged Possible causes Elimination Engine Malfunctioning injection Repair it or contact the manu- system facturer Turbocharger Air starvation, for example filter silencer clogged with dirt Clean it Compressor / turbine con- taminated Exhaust counterpressure Clean or repair the boiler or ex- too high haust silencer Enlarged flow cross-section of the nozzle ring due to de- formed blade trailing edges Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Damaged or eroded turbine Charge air cooler Cooler contaminated Clean it Cooling water volume too Top up the water low Entry temperature of cool- ing water too high Inspect / clean the cooling sys- tem Inadequate ventilation Improve the ventilation © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.3 Malfunctions during operation Charge air pressure too low Engine performance and engine speed unchanged, air intake condition normal Possible causes Elimination Engine Air receiver leaking Make repairs Gas piping between the engine and the turbine leaking Poorly adjusted injection sys- Correct it tem Poorly adjusted valve control Turbochar- Manometer display wrong Replace the manometer ger Line to manometer leaking Repair the leak

Contaminated filter silencer causing excessive loss of pres- sure Clean it

Compressor / turbine contam- inated Damaged compressor / tur- Contact an ABB Turbocharging bine Service Station Exhaust counterpressure too high Clean or repair the boiler or ex- haust silencer Charge air pressure too high Engine performance and engine speed unchanged, air intake condition normal Possible causes Elimination Engine Malfunctioning injection sys- Repair it or contact the manu- tem facturer Poorly adjusted injection sys- Correct it tem Engine performance higher Check engine performance than expected Turbochar- Manometer display wrong Replace the manometer ger © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.4 Malfunctions when stopping Contamination of the compressor due to the feeding in of ventilation gases Reduced compressor performance / efficiency and therefore engine per- formance losses Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Heavily contaminated com- pressor components Clean the compressor Optimise oil separation Increased vibration, compressor blade damage Correct the feed of ventilation gases according to instructions of enginebuilder. Reduced fatigue strength of the compressor wheel, compressor blade breakage. Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Corroded compressor wheel material Check fuel and its corrosive con- stituents and, if necessary, change fuel. 6.4 Malfunctions when stopping Noises during run-down Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Turbocharger contaminated Clean it Damaged bearing Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Rubbing rotor Foreign object in turbocharger Run-down time too short Possible causes Elimination Turbochar- ger Turbocharger contaminated Clean it Damaged bearing Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Station Rubbing rotor Foreign object in turbocharger © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 6 Troubleshooting / 6.5 Speed measurement system 6.5 Speed measurement system Possible causes Elimination No signal or amplitude is poor Fitting error The screw plug for the sensor is fitted with an additional gasket (copper ring). When fitting the speed sensor, this gasket must be removed. If the gasket is fitted by mistake, the distance from the sensor tip to the signal-generating sealing disc in- creases. As a result, the voltage amplitude of the speed signal decreases, which can cause problems for the evaluation elec- tronics. This problem is eliminated by removing the gasket. Defective sensor Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- tion Measured speeds too high Contaminated The sensor tip is magnetic and can thus at- sensor tip tract metal particles. As a result, the dis- tance to the signal-generating sealing disc is reduced, which can lead to amplification of the noise component and consequently to faulty triggering. Dismantle the sensor, clean its tip and refit the sensor using the specified tightening torque. Measured - - Contact an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- speed too low tion Other sources of errors - - If none of the above measures eliminates the malfunction, we recommend that you have the speed measuring system inspec- ted by an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- tion. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 7 Removal and installation / 7.1 Transport 7 Removal and installation 7.1 TransportSuspension of uninsulated turbocharger © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Turbocharger with oil-cooled bearing casing Complete turbocharger with gas out- let casing Suspension of insulated turbocharger Turbocharger with oil-cooled bearing casing Complete turbocharger with gas out- let casing Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 7 Removal and installation / 7.2 Turbocharger weights 7.2 Turbocharger weights Lifting gear with a sufficient load limit must be used for removing and installing the turbocharger. The following weight specification is the heaviest variant possible. This standard value may deviate from the data on the rating plate depending on the specification. TPS44 [kg] TPS48 [kg] TPS52 [kg] TPS57 [kg] TPS61 [kg] 120 180 250 410 650 7.3 Removing the turbocharger ▶ Disconnect all exhaust gas and air lines according to the instructions of the enginebuilder. Version with water-cooled bearing casing: ▶ Disconnect the water pipes according to the instructions of the en- ginebuilder. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 If present, remove hard insulation as follows: ▶ Remove screws and sheet metal (B) from the bearing casing insula- tion. ▶ Remove the remaining screws from the bearing casing insulation (A). ▶ Pull the bearing casing insulation up and off. The bearing casing insu- lation can be compressed to facilitate the removal process. ▶ Unplug the cable connector from the speed sensor. ▶ Attach lifting gear to bearing casing. ▶ If a gas outlet bend is present, sling lifting gear around it or secure it to the lifting gear with a swivel lifting eye (C). Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 7 Removal and installation / 7.4 Installing the turbocharger ▶ Loosen the fixing screws (D) on the bearing casing. ▶ Lift the turbocharger from the engine and put it down. ▶ Cover oil connections. 7.4 Installing the turbocharger ▶ Remove covers from oil connections. ▶ Visually inspect O-ring gaskets of oil supply and drain pipe (O-ring gaskets for engine are not included in the scope of delivery of ABB). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 **) When the turbocharger is mounted on the engine support, the bolt threads and screw heads must be lightly oiled (assumed friction coeffi- cient μ = 0.12 for tightening torque) Strength class in accordance with DIN/ISO 898: 10.9/12.9

Product Through hole in bearing casing Thread size Tightening torque

TPS44 17 mm M16 230 Nm TPS48 17 mm M16 230 Nm TPS52 21 mm M20 455 Nm TPS57 21 mm M20 455 Nm TPS61 25 mm M24 780 Nm ▶ Attach lifting gear to bearing casing. ▶ If a gas outlet manifold is provided, sling lifting gear around it addi- tionally or fasten it to lifting gear using a swivel lifting eye (C) (see also section Transport / Weights). ▶ Lift turbocharger, place on bracket and align. ▶ Tighten fixing screws (D) to the bearing casing in accordance with the table above. Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 7 Removal and installation / 7.4 Installing the turbocharger ▶ Fasten all gas, water and air lines in accordance with the engineb- uilder's instructions. If present: ▶ Fit speed sensor and plug in cable connector. ▶ Adapt and fit bearing casing insulation (A). ▶ Adapt and fit sheet metal (B) of bearing casing insulation. Version with water-cooled bearing casing: ▶ Remove the screw plugs from the water connections and fit the water pipes in accordance with the enginebuilder's instructions. © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 Operation Manual / TPS44-F.. - TPS61-F.. 8 Disassembly and assembly / 8.1 Introduction 8 Disassembly and assembly 8.1 Introduction Precondition for the work described below is a turbocharger removed from the engine (refer to the chapter entitled Removal and Installation). © Copyright 2020 . All rights reserved. HZTL2412_EN Rev.G March 2020 CAUTION Further work Only the work described in this Operation Manual may be carried out. Incorrectly performed disassembly and assembly of the cartridge group can lead to serious machine damage. ▶ ABB Turbocharging recommends having further work carried out only by trained personnel from an ABB Turbocharging Service Sta- tion. ▶ Mark the casing position for assembly. Identifying assembly devices Not all assembly devices are marked with a part number. They can be identified using the tool list. This list is enclosed in the toolbox. WARNING Maintaining assembly devices Assembly devices must be checked for damage before and after use. ▶ Check visually for corrosion, cracks, deformation and wear. ▶ Don't use damaged assembly devices, but replace them. Customer spare part set Before beginning work, ensure that the required customer spare part sets are available. ▶ See chapter Spare parts. Oil orifice ▶ When disassembling the turbocharger, a fitted oil orifice must not be removed. Tightening torques for turbocharger components The specified tightening torques of screw connections for turbocharger components must be observed (see section Table of tightening torques).


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-41G (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-41G (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: USER’S MANUAL 2 - © 2017. All Rights Reserved. Aspire 5 Covers: A515-51 / A515-51G / A515-41G This revision: April 2017 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID: • Create your own connected world. • Get the latest offers and product information. • Register your device for quick, personalized customer support. For more information, please visit the Acer BYOC website: acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ Table of contents - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

First things first 5 Your guides ............................................. 5 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 5 Turning your computer off........................... 5 Taking care of your computer ..................... 6 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 7 Your Acer notebook tour 8 Screen view............................................. 8 Keyboard view......................................... 9 Left view ................................................ 10 Right view ............................................. 11 USB 3.0 information.................................. 11 Base view ............................................. 12 Using the keyboard 13 Lock keys............................................... 13 Hotkeys..................................................... 13 Windows keys........................................ 14 Using the Precision Touchpad 15 Touchpad gestures................................ 15 Changing touchpad settings.................. 16 Recovery 18 Creating a factory default backup.......... 18 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers.................................................... 21 Restoring your computer ....................... 21 Reset this PC and keep my files............... 21 Reset this PC and remove everything ...... 22 Using a Bluetooth connection 25 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 25 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 25 Connecting to the Internet 27 Connecting to a wireless network.......... 27 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 27 Connecting with a cable ........................ 31 Built-in network feature ............................. 31 Connecting to a cellular network ........... 31 Bluelight Shield 32 Securing your computer 34 Using a computer security lock.............. 34 Using passwords ................................... 34 Entering passwords .................................. 35 BIOS utility 36 Boot sequence....................................... 36 Setting passwords ................................. 36 Power management 37 Saving power......................................... 37 Battery pack 39 Battery characteristics ........................... 39 Charging the battery ................................. 39 Optimizing battery life ............................... 40 Checking the battery level......................... 41 Battery-low warning .................................. 41 Traveling with your computer 42 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 42 Moving around....................................... 42 Preparing the computer ............................ 42 What to bring to meetings......................... 43 Taking the computer home.................... 43 Preparing the computer ............................ 43 What to take with you................................ 44 Special considerations.............................. 44 Setting up a home office ........................... 44 Traveling with the computer................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 45 What to take with you................................ 45 Special considerations.............................. 45 Traveling internationally......................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 46 What to bring with you .............................. 46 Special considerations.............................. 46 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 48 USB Type-C port 49 SD card reader 50 Video and audio connectors 51 Connecting a monitor............................. 51 Headphones and microphone................ 51 HDMI 52 Frequently asked questions 54 Requesting service ................................ 56 Tips and hints for using Windows 10..... 57 How do I get to Start? ............................... 57 How do I turn off my computer?................ 57 How do I unlock my computer?................. 57 How do I set the alarm?............................ 59 Where are my apps?................................. 60 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 60 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 61 Where can I get more information?........... 61 Troubleshooting..................................... 62 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 62 Error messages......................................... 62 Internet and online security 64 First steps on the net ............................. 64 Protecting your computer.......................... 64 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 64 Network connections................................. 66 Surf the Net!.............................................. 67 Internet security software.......................... 68

Getting started... In this section you will find: • Useful information on caring for your computer and your health • Where to find the power button, ports and connectors • Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard • How to create recovery backups • Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth • Information on using Acer’s bundled software First things first - 5 FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides: First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the User’s Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. Once you have connected to the internet, you can download updates for your computer from: go.acer.com/?id=17883 1.The link will open the Acer Service & Support webpage. 2.Scroll down to Drivers and Manuals and search for your model by pasting in or manually entering the serial number, SNID, or product model. 3.From this page you can also download and install the Acer identification utility that will automatically detect your computer’s serial number and SNID and allow you to copy it to the clipboard. 4.Once you have found your product model, any updates, or documents will be listed. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following: • Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Shut down. 6 - First things first • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but don’t want to completely shut it down, you can put it to Sleep by doing any of the following: • Press the power button. • Press the sleep hotkey. • Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Sleep. • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Sleep. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for up to ten seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. • Only use the adapter provided with your device, or an Acer- approved adapter to power your device. • Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. • Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0o C (32o F) or above 50o C (122o F). • Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. • Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. • Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. • Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. • Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. • Never place objects on top of the computer. • Do not slam the computer display when you close it. • Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. First things first - 7 Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter: • Do not connect the adapter to any other device. • Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Route the power cord and any cables away from where people walk. • When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. • The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps: 1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If your computer is dropped or visibly damaged, or does not work normally, please contact your nearest authorized Acer service center. 8 - Your Acer notebook tour YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 12 # Icon Item Description 1 Webcam 3 Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. 2 Screen with lay-flat hinge Displays computer output. 3 Microphones Internal stereo digital microphones for sound recording. Your Acer notebook tour - 9 Keyboard view 12 3 # Icon Item Description

1 Keyboard For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 13. 2 Touchpad Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click.

3 Power button Turns the computer on and off. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour Left view 1 2 3 4 5 6 # Icon Item Description 1 Kensington lock slot Connects to a Kensington-compatible security lock. 2 Ethernet (RJ-45) port Connects to an Ethernet 10/100/ 1000-based network. Pull the lip down to open the port fully. 3 USB Type-C port Connects to USB devices that adopt the USB Type-C connector. Supports USB 3.1 Type-C, Gen 1 with transfer speeds up to 5 Gb/s. 4 HDMI port Supports high-definition digital video connections. 5 USB port with power-off charging Connect to USB devices. 6 SD card reader Accepts one Secure Digital (SD or SDHC) card. Only one card can operate at a time. Your Acer notebook tour - 11 Right view 1 2 34 # Icon Item Description 1 Headset/ speaker jack Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. 2 USB port Connects to USB devices. 3 Power indicator Indicates status. the computer’s power Battery indicator Indicates the computer’s battery status. Charging: The light shows amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light shows blue when in AC mode. 4 DC-in jack Connects to an AC adapter. USB 3.0 information • USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. • Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. • For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. • Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Base view 123 4 # Icon Item Description 1 Ventilation and cooling fan Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. 2 Houses the computer’s main storage. Main storage compartment You may upgrade your computer’s main storage. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. Memory compartment Houses the computer’s memory. You may upgrade your computer’s mmemory. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. 3 Speakers Deliver stereo audio output. 4 Battery reset pinhole Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Using the keyboard - 13 USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and a separate numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys The keyboard has lock keys which you can use to turn keyboard functions on and off. Lock key Description Caps Lock When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. Num Lock Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the Fn key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. When Num Lock is on, the keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator (complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. Scroll Lock Fn + F12 When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Hotkey Icon Function Description Fn + F3 Airplane mode Turns on / off the computer's network devices. Fn + F4 Sleep Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Fn + F5 Display toggle Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. 14 - Using the keyboard Hotkey Icon Function Description Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Windows key Turns the display screen Fn + F6 Display off backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Fn + F7 Touchpad toggle Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. Fn + F8 Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Fn + F12 Scroll Lock Turns Scroll Lock on or off. Fn + Del Insert Turns Insert on or off. Fn + Brightness up Increases the screen brightness. Fn + Brightness down Decreases the screen brightness. Fn + Volume up Increases the sound volume. Fn + Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Fn + Home Play/Pause Play or pause a selected media file. Fn + Pg Up Stop Stop playing the selected media file. Fn + Pg Dn Previous Return to the previous media file. Fn + End Next Jump to the next media file. Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. Application key This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Using the Precision Touchpad - 15 USING THE PRECISION TOUCHPAD The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. The Precision Touchpad (PTP) is designed to provide a more uniform, smooth, and accurate touchpad experience. Many applications support precision touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers, however, some gestures may not be supported by the specific application or program you are using. Touchpad gestures Single-finger slide Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Two-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with two fingers to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, this will toggle the app commands. In most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. Two-finger slide Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. 16 - Using the Precision Touchpad Three-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with three fingers to open Cortana (if your computer supports Cortana) or open the Action Center (if your computer does not support Cortana). The precision touchpad includes added technology features that help recognize and prevent unintentional gestures such as accidental taps, gestures, and pointer movement. Changing touchpad settings To change the touchpad settings to suit your personal requirements, please do the following. 1.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 2.Select All settings. Three-finger swipe Swipe across the touchpad with three fingers. • Swipe up to open Task View. Move the cursor over a window and tap the touchpad to select that window, or swipe downwards to exit Task View. • Swipe down to minimize all open windows and show Desktop; swipe upwards to restore the minimized windows. • Swipe left or right to switch between open windows. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. Using the Precision Touchpad - 17 3.Select Devices > Mouse & touchpad. 4.Now you can adjust the settings to suit your personal needs. You can change the primary button for left- or right-handed use, turn the touchpad off if you prefer to use a mouse, or set a delay to prevent the cursor from moving if you accidentally tap the touchpad with your palm while working. Scroll down to see more settings. 18 - Recovery RECOVERY If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Got a question? on page 53) do not help, you can recover your computer. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Care Center, which allows you to reset your PC, refresh your PC, or create a factory default backup. Note Acer Care Center is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Factory Default Backup as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a factory default backup Backup allows you to quickly and easily back up your operating system, installed apps and data. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. Recovery - 19 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get Started for Create Factory Default Backup to open the Recovery Drive window. 3.Make sure Backup system files to the recovery drive is selected and click Next. 4.Plug in the USB drive and wait for the PC to detect the USB drive then click Next. 20 - Recovery• Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. 5.Everything on the drive will be deleted. Click Create to continue. 6.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery information on your computer. If you delete this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. 9.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovery - 21 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers Back up your wireless and LAN drivers. You can use these backups to install the wireless and LAN drivers if you install another operating system. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get started for Backup wireless and LAN drivers. Choose a folder to save your drivers and select OK. Restoring your computer Recovery Management allows you to quickly and easily restore your computer back to its default status. You can choose to keep your files or remove them before reinstalling Windows. Reset this PC and keep my files 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get started to Choose an option. 22 - Recovery3.Select Keep my files to refresh your PC and reinstall your operating system without removing your personal files. Click Next to continue. Important If you have apps installed on your PC, they will be removed. 4.Resetting the PC will reinstall Windows, change settings back to their factory defaults and remove all preinstalled apps and programs without removing your personal files. Click Reset to continue. 5.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 6.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will have been reset back to its factory default settings without removing your personal files. Reset this PC and remove everything 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Recovery - 23 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get Started to Choose an option. 3.Select Remove everything to reset your PC back to its factory default. This process will reinstall your operating system and remove all of your personal files, apps, and settings. 4.Select Just remove my files if you are keeping your computer. This will be quicker, but less secure. Files may still be recovered with a file recovery program. Select Remove files and clean the drive if you are not keeping 24 - Recoveryyour computer. This process will take longer, but will be more secure. Warning Selecting "Remove files and clean the drive" will remove all of your personal files and accounts, along with pre-existing drivers that may affect your Windows installation. 5. Click Reset to continue. 6.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 7.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 8.Follow the process until it completes. 9.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will use factory default settings. Using a Bluetooth connection - 25 USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth- enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following: 1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computer’s USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owner’s manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computer’s Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computer’s Bluetooth adapter, do the following: 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Devices > Bluetooth, and click the toggle under Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 2.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 26 - Using a Bluetooth connection 3.Select the device you wish to pair from the list of discovered devices, and select Pair. 4.A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs (as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000" or "1234"). Consult your device’s user manual for more information. You can also enter the Bluetooth settings by selecting the Notifications icon in the lower right-hand corner of the screen to open the Notifications pane. From here, you can enable or disable Bluetooth or right-click on Bluetooth > Go to settings to enter the Bluetooth settings. Connecting to the Internet - 27 CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET This chapter includes general information on types of connections, and getting connected to the internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 66. Your computer’s built-in network features make it easy for you to connect your computer to the internet. First though, in order to connect to the internet from home, you’ll need to sign up for internet services from an ISP (Internet Service Provider) -- usually a phone or cable company -- that will have to go to your home or office to set up internet service. The ISP will install a small box, a router or modem, that will allow you to connect to the internet. Connecting to a wireless network Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your internet connection itself. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computer’s wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. 28 - Connecting to the Internet To connect to a wireless network, please follow the steps below. 1.Ensure you have a wireless router/access point and current internet connection through the ISP of your choice. Make a note of the wireless network’s name and password (if necessary). If you are trying to connect to a public network (such as at a coffeeshop), make sure you have the wireless network’s name. Note Please refer to your ISP or router documentation for details on connecting to the internet. 2.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 3.Select All settings. 4.Select Network & internet. Connecting to the Internet - 29 5.Make sure Wi-Fi is On and select Show available networks. 6.You will see a list of available wireless networks. Select the one you wish to use. 30 - Connecting to the Internet 7.Once you select a wireless network, select Connect. 8.If required, enter the network’s password. Connecting to the Internet - 31 Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature If your computer has a network port, plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router (refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting to a cellular network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the internet using a cellular phone network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Contact your cellular provider for more information on connecting to the internet using a cellular network. 32 - Bluelight Shield BLUELIGHT SHIELD The Bluelight Shield can be enabled to reduce blue-light emissions from the screen to protect your eyes. To configure the Bluelight Shield, Search for ’Acer Quick Access’ in the Start Menu. From here you can toggle Bluelight Shield on or off, and you can choose from four different modes to fit your needs: No. Item Description 1 Low Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 10% to 25% for basic protection. 2 Medium Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 26% to 45% to protect your eyes. 3 High Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 46% to 65% for maximum protection. 4 Long Hour Mode Professionally tuned to reduce eye strain over an extended period of time. Note Specifications vary depending on model. Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find: • How to secure your computer • Setting passwords • What you need to prepare when you’re traveling • How to get the most out of your battery 34 - Securing your computer SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks — a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a computer security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data: • Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 36. • User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. • Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Securing your computer - 35 Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. • When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. • Type the Supervisor Password and press Enter to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. • When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. • Type the User Password and press Enter to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. 36 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press F2 while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Find Set Supervisor Password and enter a password to enable this feature. Once you have entered a password for this feature, you may then enable/disable Password on Boot. Remember to select F10 to properly save and exit the BIOS utility when you are done making changes. Power management - 37 POWER MANAGEMENT This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of the following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computer’s battery. If you prefer to reduce your computer’s power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup: Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 38 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. Battery pack - 39 BATTERY PACK The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow: 1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 40 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0° C (32° F) or above 45° C (113° F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns: • Using the computer on constant AC power. • Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. • Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below: • Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. • Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. • Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10° C (50° F) to 30° C (86° F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. • Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. • Look after your AC adapter and battery. Battery pack - 41 Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation: Situation Recommended Action The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 42 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories: 1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer: Press the Windows key + C, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or: Traveling with your computer - 43 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing the Sleep hotkey or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press the Sleep hotkey or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home: • Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. • Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 44 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you: • AC adapter and power cord. • The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work: • Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. • If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. • Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10° C (18° F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with your computer - 45 Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you: • AC adapter • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling: • Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. • If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X- ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. 46 - Traveling with your computer Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. What to bring with you Bring the following items with you: • AC adapter. • Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. • Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. • International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally: • When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. • If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in. Ports and connectors... In this section you will find: • Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 48 - Universal Serial Bus (USB) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0 (High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your device’s documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. USB Type-C port - 49 USB TYPE-C PORT A USB Type-C port is a connector that allows you to easily connect USB Type-C peripherals, such as additional storage (e.g. an external drive), or any other compatible device. The Type-C port is reversable; connectors may be inserted with either side up. Note On Acer computers USB Type-C ports support up to USB 3.1 (SuperSpeed USB, 5 Gbps). Other USB or Thunderbolt devices with a USB Type-C connector are supported, but transfer speed may be reduced and certain functions will be disabled (such as Thunderbolt video support). Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 50 - SD card reader SD CARD READER SD (Secure Digital) cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, tablets, media players and cellular phones. Inserting an SD card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows AutoPlay window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Important When removing an SD card, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <card name>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB; SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB; and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB (2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Video and audio connectors - 51 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Add an external monitor to your computer via a video port. The type of port available depends on your computer’s configuration. Connecting a monitor 1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.The correct resolution and refresh rate should be detected automatically. If necessary, change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key ( ) + W, type "Display" and then click on Display. Headphones and microphone One or more 3.5 mm jacks on your computer allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers; connecting an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone; connecting a microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 52 - HDMI HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. Got a question? In this section you will find: • Frequently asked questions • Tips for using Windows 10 • Troubleshooting information • How to protect yourself while online • Where to find Acer service center contact information 54 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Check if power is being supplied to the computer (if your computer has a power indicator, it will be off); if there is no power, check the following: • If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. You may need to wait a few minutes before trying to turn your computer on again. • Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If power is being supplied to the computer, check the following: • Do you have a USB storage device (USB drive, CD drive or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press Ctrl + Alt + Del to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computer’s power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause: • The brightness level might be too low. Use the Brightness up hotkey to adjust the brightness level. • The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey to toggle the display back to the computer. • The computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode (if there is a power LED, it will flash). Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following: • The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) Frequently asked questions - 55 icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. • The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control hotkeys to adjust the volume. • If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. • Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. • Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.If there is a D2D Recovery setting in Main, make sure it is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. 56 - Frequently asked questions Note To access the BIOS utility, press F2 when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Restoring your computer on page 21. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty (ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of- purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information: Name: Address: Telephone number: Machine and model type: Serial number: Date of purchase: Frequently ask Frequently asked questions - 57 Tips and hints for using Windows 10 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button on the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Where’s the Start button? The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Selecting it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select All apps to show a list of installed apps on the computer. How do I turn off my computer? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select the power icon > Shut down. You can also turn off the computer by right-clicking the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. Can I turn off notifications? You can turn off notifications so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > System > Notifications & actions. From here you can enable/disable notifications for all of your apps or choose which apps to enable/disable. How do I unlock my computer? Press the space bar and select a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. 58 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen? You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. From here you can: • Select a background image for the lock screen • Turn the Slide show on or off • Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow? 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. 2.Under Background, select Slideshow. 3.Select Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Select Choose this folder to add the folder to the lock screen slideshow. 4.Select a folder and select Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles? Select a tile and drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups? Yes, you can. Select an existing tile and drag the tile to arrange Start to your liking. Right-click on an app and select Pin to Start to create a new group on Start. From here, you can drag the tile to an existing group on Start. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Can I make tiles bigger or smaller? Yes, you can. Right-click on a tile and select Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. Frequently asked questions - 59 Can I change the screen resolution? Yes, you can. Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and type 'Control Panel' in the text box to display the results; select Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. Alternatively, you can also right-click anywhere on the desktop and select Screen resolution. How do I set the alarm? Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Type ’Alarms’ to search for the Alarms & Clock app. 1.Select an alarm from the list, or select the + in the lower-right corner to create a new alarm. 2.Enter the Alarm name. 3.Set the time by choosing the hour and minute. 4.Select AM or PM. 5.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 6.Select the sound notification. 7.Select the snooze time. 8.Select the Save icon in the bottom right-hand corner to save the alarm. 9.Select On or Off to activate or deactivate the alarm. Hour Minutes Save Delete Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. 60 - Frequently asked questions Where are my apps? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search, start typing the name of the app you would like to open. How do I make an app appear on Start? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, right-click an app and select Pin to Start. How do I remove a tile from Start? Right-click a tile to select it and select Unpin from Start to remove the tile from Start. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, right-click an app or tile and select Pin to taskbar. How do I install apps? You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search. Type the name of the app you would like to open. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to ’Windows Accessories’ to see the list of legacy programs. What is a Microsoft ID (account)? A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Frequently asked questions - 61 Do I need one? You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 10, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one? If you've already installed Windows 10 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Accounts > Sign in with a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I check for Windows updates? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Select Advanced options to configure the settings. Where can I get more information? For more information please visit the following pages: • Windows 10 information: go.acer.com/windows-tutorial • Support FAQs: support.acer.com Frequently asked questions 62 - Frequently asked questions Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips This computer incorporates an advanced design that delivers onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. Error messages If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages Corrective action CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. CMOS checksum error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Disk boot failure Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Enter to reboot. Equipment configuration error Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Hard disk 0 error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 extended type error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. I/O parity error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Frequently asked questions - 63 Error messages Corrective action Keyboard error or no keyboard connected If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Keyboard interface error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Memory size mismatch Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. 64 - Internet and online security INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the internet (see Internet security software on page 68). A comprehensive internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the internet (you may need additional software or a special ‘box’ that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (‘modem’) connector. This allows you to connect to the internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the Internet and online security - 65 internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an ‘always-on’ connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the internet (this requires a ‘micro-filter’ on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an ‘router’ that provides network and Wi-Fi access. CableA cable connection provides fast and always-on internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the internet. Cellular A cellular connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the cellular features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. 66 - Internet and online security Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network? Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following: Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their Internet and online security - 67 services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter Most computers feature a wireless module and Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. You may also turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Search ’HomeGroup’ and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. After take off, ask the cabin crew if you may enable Wi-Fi. Surf the Net! To surf the internet, you need a program called an internet browser. Microsoft Edge provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your internet access installed and you are connected, from the Start Menu, click the Microsoft Edge tile or the icon located in the taskbar and take your internet experience to a new level! Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalized support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads! 68 - Internet and online security Internet security software To help you stay ahead of cybercriminals, Acer has partnered with Norton to offer you security for all your devices. Select Acer computers include protection by Norton Security Norton Security is pre-installed on select Acer computers, protecting your identity and financial data from viruses, spyware, malware and other online threats. Learn more about how to stay safe online and how to stay protected after your introductory subscription ends. Staying ahead of cybercriminals Stay ahead of hackers and cybercriminals by understanding the tactics they use to access your private data. Ensure your software is up to date Cybercriminals rely heavily upon software or platform vulnerabilities, as they are the easiest way to sneak malware into a user's device unnoticed, sometimes with little action on the user's part. Immediately after a software manufacturer announces an update, hackers are ready with malware that can breach holes in the software that would have been patched if the update was installed. How to stay safe: Perform any and all software updates as soon as they are available. Keep a lookout for fake or phishing emails Beware of emails that appear to be from a friend or business colleague that you know but seem a little odd. Maybe they didn't capitalize your name or there are misspellings. The email might be from cybercriminals who are trying to fool you into sending them your credit card number, social security number, or logging into a fake bank website that looks like yours but really isn't. How to stay safe: Use a strong antispam filter. If an email looks strange, don't click on anything and delete it immediately. Instead manually launch a browser and type in your bank's website address and log-in yourself. Don't be fooled if someone calls your phone A tech support scam is a form of online fraud where people call you on the phone saying they're Technical Support from a trusted Internet and online security - 69 company like Norton or Microsoft and that you have a virus. The main motive behind these scams is to extort money from the victim. Cybercriminals can also install malware such as keylogging software or backdoor Trojans in order to gain access to personal information. How to stay safe: Don't fall for phone calls that tell you your software or computer isn't working. Never give your personal information like social security or credit card numbers to someone that you don't know over the phone. Common threats cybercriminals use Now you know a few very common ways cybercriminals try to sneak onto your device or trick you into providing private information to them directly. Here are a few of the types of malware they like to deploy once they've got into a device and what to do if you're ever infected. Ransomware A form of malware that will encrypt personal data files on your computer and attached devices. Encryption converts files into another format, that can only be opened with a specific decryption key. Once the ransomware installs itself, it will display a warning message that the computer is now locked. The user is given a specific amount of money to pay as a "fine" and a timeframe in which to pay. Even if paid, the criminal might choose to not unencrypt the files anyway! What to do if you're infected: Avoid getting infected in the first place by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. Also, perform regular backups of all your data either online or to a separate external hard drive that is only attached to your computer while performing the backup. Ransomware has been known to lock access to external hard drives attached to the computer. If you are infected with ransomware, think twice before you pay the ransom. There is no guarantee the cybercriminal will unlock your files and you'll be funding them to prey upon another innocent victim. Botnets A botnet is a string of infected, connected computers coordinated together to perform a task. Botnets gain access to your machine through some piece of malicious coding. Once the software is downloaded, the botnet will now contact its master computer and let it know that everything is ready to go. Now your computer, phone, 70 - Internet and online security tablet, or IoT device is entirely under the control of the person who created the botnet. Most people who are infected with botnets aren't even aware that their computer's security has become compromised! What to do if you're infected: If you're infected you probably don't realize it as bots are notoriously quiet. Your Internet Service Provider might send you a notification alerting you that they found a threat on your network and that you need to remove the bot. If you have a bot, use internet security software like Norton Security to scan all of your devices. Viruses/Malware "Virus" is the commonplace word for all malicious software programs for years now; however, a virus is just one type of malicious threat. A virus is classified as a self-replicating piece of malicious code that travels by inserting itself into files or programs. What to do if you're infected: Take steps to avoid infection by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. If you subscribed to Norton Security and think you may have a virus, contact Norton's on-call technicians to help eliminate the virus. Take special precautions when using public Wi-Fi Public Wi-Fi is available just about everywhere, from the local coffee shop to the hotels and airports you visit while traveling. While public Wi-Fi has made our lives a little easier, it also poses security risks to the personal information available on our laptops and smartphones. A virtual private network (VPN) gives you online privacy and anonymity by creating a private network from a public internet connection. VPNs mask your internet protocol (IP) address so your online actions are virtually untraceable as well as secure. One of the biggest security risks on public Wi-Fi are man-in-the-middle attacks (MITM). These attacks are akin to eavesdropping. Data is sent from point A (computer) to point B (server/website), and an attacker can get in- between these transmissions. They then set up tools programmed to "listen in" on transmissions, intercept data that is specifically targeted as valuable, and capture the data, such as your login credentials and passwords. Use a virtual private network (VPN) to ensure your privacy and anonymity are protected when you use public Wi-Fi. VPN services Internet and online security - 71 can encrypt all the data that you send and receive while using a public Wi-Fi hotspot, securing your information from hackers and other users of the same connection. For more tips on how to stay safe Good security habits can reduce your exposure to online crime. By adopting a few basic behaviors, you can make big strides in reducing cybercrime risk: • Protect your accounts with strong, unique passwords that use a combination of at least 10 uppercase and lowercase letters, symbols and numbers. • Don't click on random links or open unsolicited messages and attachments-particularly from people you don't know. • Don't access any personal information or social media accounts over unprotected Wi-Fi networks. • Use security software on your devices to help protect yourself from the latest threats. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk? If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-51 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-51 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: USER’S MANUAL 2 - © 2017. All Rights Reserved. Aspire 5 Covers: A515-51 / A515-51G / A515-41G This revision: April 2017 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID: • Create your own connected world. • Get the latest offers and product information. • Register your device for quick, personalized customer support. For more information, please visit the Acer BYOC website: acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ Table of contents - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

First things first 5 Your guides ............................................. 5 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 5 Turning your computer off........................... 5 Taking care of your computer ..................... 6 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 7 Your Acer notebook tour 8 Screen view............................................. 8 Keyboard view......................................... 9 Left view ................................................ 10 Right view ............................................. 11 USB 3.0 information.................................. 11 Base view ............................................. 12 Using the keyboard 13 Lock keys............................................... 13 Hotkeys..................................................... 13 Windows keys........................................ 14 Using the Precision Touchpad 15 Touchpad gestures................................ 15 Changing touchpad settings.................. 16 Recovery 18 Creating a factory default backup.......... 18 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers.................................................... 21 Restoring your computer ....................... 21 Reset this PC and keep my files............... 21 Reset this PC and remove everything ...... 22 Using a Bluetooth connection 25 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 25 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 25 Connecting to the Internet 27 Connecting to a wireless network.......... 27 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 27 Connecting with a cable ........................ 31 Built-in network feature ............................. 31 Connecting to a cellular network ........... 31 Bluelight Shield 32 Securing your computer 34 Using a computer security lock.............. 34 Using passwords ................................... 34 Entering passwords .................................. 35 BIOS utility 36 Boot sequence....................................... 36 Setting passwords ................................. 36 Power management 37 Saving power......................................... 37 Battery pack 39 Battery characteristics ........................... 39 Charging the battery ................................. 39 Optimizing battery life ............................... 40 Checking the battery level......................... 41 Battery-low warning .................................. 41 Traveling with your computer 42 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 42 Moving around....................................... 42 Preparing the computer ............................ 42 What to bring to meetings......................... 43 Taking the computer home.................... 43 Preparing the computer ............................ 43 What to take with you................................ 44 Special considerations.............................. 44 Setting up a home office ........................... 44 Traveling with the computer................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 45 What to take with you................................ 45 Special considerations.............................. 45 Traveling internationally......................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 46 What to bring with you .............................. 46 Special considerations.............................. 46 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 48 USB Type-C port 49 SD card reader 50 Video and audio connectors 51 Connecting a monitor............................. 51 Headphones and microphone................ 51 HDMI 52 Frequently asked questions 54 Requesting service ................................ 56 Tips and hints for using Windows 10..... 57 How do I get to Start? ............................... 57 How do I turn off my computer?................ 57 How do I unlock my computer?................. 57 How do I set the alarm?............................ 59 Where are my apps?................................. 60 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 60 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 61 Where can I get more information?........... 61 Troubleshooting..................................... 62 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 62 Error messages......................................... 62 Internet and online security 64 First steps on the net ............................. 64 Protecting your computer.......................... 64 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 64 Network connections................................. 66 Surf the Net!.............................................. 67 Internet security software.......................... 68

Getting started... In this section you will find: • Useful information on caring for your computer and your health • Where to find the power button, ports and connectors • Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard • How to create recovery backups • Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth • Information on using Acer’s bundled software First things first - 5 FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides: First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the User’s Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. Once you have connected to the internet, you can download updates for your computer from: go.acer.com/?id=17883 1.The link will open the Acer Service & Support webpage. 2.Scroll down to Drivers and Manuals and search for your model by pasting in or manually entering the serial number, SNID, or product model. 3.From this page you can also download and install the Acer identification utility that will automatically detect your computer’s serial number and SNID and allow you to copy it to the clipboard. 4.Once you have found your product model, any updates, or documents will be listed. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following: • Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Shut down. 6 - First things first • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but don’t want to completely shut it down, you can put it to Sleep by doing any of the following: • Press the power button. • Press the sleep hotkey. • Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Sleep. • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Sleep. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for up to ten seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. • Only use the adapter provided with your device, or an Acer- approved adapter to power your device. • Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. • Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0o C (32o F) or above 50o C (122o F). • Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. • Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. • Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. • Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. • Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. • Never place objects on top of the computer. • Do not slam the computer display when you close it. • Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. First things first - 7 Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter: • Do not connect the adapter to any other device. • Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Route the power cord and any cables away from where people walk. • When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. • The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps: 1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If your computer is dropped or visibly damaged, or does not work normally, please contact your nearest authorized Acer service center. 8 - Your Acer notebook tour YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 12 # Icon Item Description 1 Webcam 3 Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. 2 Screen with lay-flat hinge Displays computer output. 3 Microphones Internal stereo digital microphones for sound recording. Your Acer notebook tour - 9 Keyboard view 12 3 # Icon Item Description

1 Keyboard For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 13. 2 Touchpad Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click.

3 Power button Turns the computer on and off. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour Left view 1 2 3 4 5 6 # Icon Item Description 1 Kensington lock slot Connects to a Kensington-compatible security lock. 2 Ethernet (RJ-45) port Connects to an Ethernet 10/100/ 1000-based network. Pull the lip down to open the port fully. 3 USB Type-C port Connects to USB devices that adopt the USB Type-C connector. Supports USB 3.1 Type-C, Gen 1 with transfer speeds up to 5 Gb/s. 4 HDMI port Supports high-definition digital video connections. 5 USB port with power-off charging Connect to USB devices. 6 SD card reader Accepts one Secure Digital (SD or SDHC) card. Only one card can operate at a time. Your Acer notebook tour - 11 Right view 1 2 34 # Icon Item Description 1 Headset/ speaker jack Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. 2 USB port Connects to USB devices. 3 Power indicator Indicates status. the computer’s power Battery indicator Indicates the computer’s battery status. Charging: The light shows amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light shows blue when in AC mode. 4 DC-in jack Connects to an AC adapter. USB 3.0 information • USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. • Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. • For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. • Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Base view 123 4 # Icon Item Description 1 Ventilation and cooling fan Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. 2 Houses the computer’s main storage. Main storage compartment You may upgrade your computer’s main storage. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. Memory compartment Houses the computer’s memory. You may upgrade your computer’s mmemory. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. 3 Speakers Deliver stereo audio output. 4 Battery reset pinhole Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Using the keyboard - 13 USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and a separate numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys The keyboard has lock keys which you can use to turn keyboard functions on and off. Lock key Description Caps Lock When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. Num Lock Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the Fn key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. When Num Lock is on, the keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator (complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. Scroll Lock Fn + F12 When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Hotkey Icon Function Description Fn + F3 Airplane mode Turns on / off the computer's network devices. Fn + F4 Sleep Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Fn + F5 Display toggle Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. 14 - Using the keyboard Hotkey Icon Function Description Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Windows key Turns the display screen Fn + F6 Display off backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Fn + F7 Touchpad toggle Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. Fn + F8 Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Fn + F12 Scroll Lock Turns Scroll Lock on or off. Fn + Del Insert Turns Insert on or off. Fn + Brightness up Increases the screen brightness. Fn + Brightness down Decreases the screen brightness. Fn + Volume up Increases the sound volume. Fn + Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Fn + Home Play/Pause Play or pause a selected media file. Fn + Pg Up Stop Stop playing the selected media file. Fn + Pg Dn Previous Return to the previous media file. Fn + End Next Jump to the next media file. Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. Application key This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Using the Precision Touchpad - 15 USING THE PRECISION TOUCHPAD The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. The Precision Touchpad (PTP) is designed to provide a more uniform, smooth, and accurate touchpad experience. Many applications support precision touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers, however, some gestures may not be supported by the specific application or program you are using. Touchpad gestures Single-finger slide Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Two-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with two fingers to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, this will toggle the app commands. In most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. Two-finger slide Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. 16 - Using the Precision Touchpad Three-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with three fingers to open Cortana (if your computer supports Cortana) or open the Action Center (if your computer does not support Cortana). The precision touchpad includes added technology features that help recognize and prevent unintentional gestures such as accidental taps, gestures, and pointer movement. Changing touchpad settings To change the touchpad settings to suit your personal requirements, please do the following. 1.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 2.Select All settings. Three-finger swipe Swipe across the touchpad with three fingers. • Swipe up to open Task View. Move the cursor over a window and tap the touchpad to select that window, or swipe downwards to exit Task View. • Swipe down to minimize all open windows and show Desktop; swipe upwards to restore the minimized windows. • Swipe left or right to switch between open windows. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. Using the Precision Touchpad - 17 3.Select Devices > Mouse & touchpad. 4.Now you can adjust the settings to suit your personal needs. You can change the primary button for left- or right-handed use, turn the touchpad off if you prefer to use a mouse, or set a delay to prevent the cursor from moving if you accidentally tap the touchpad with your palm while working. Scroll down to see more settings. 18 - Recovery RECOVERY If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Got a question? on page 53) do not help, you can recover your computer. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Care Center, which allows you to reset your PC, refresh your PC, or create a factory default backup. Note Acer Care Center is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Factory Default Backup as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a factory default backup Backup allows you to quickly and easily back up your operating system, installed apps and data. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. Recovery - 19 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get Started for Create Factory Default Backup to open the Recovery Drive window. 3.Make sure Backup system files to the recovery drive is selected and click Next. 4.Plug in the USB drive and wait for the PC to detect the USB drive then click Next. 20 - Recovery• Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. 5.Everything on the drive will be deleted. Click Create to continue. 6.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery information on your computer. If you delete this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. 9.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovery - 21 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers Back up your wireless and LAN drivers. You can use these backups to install the wireless and LAN drivers if you install another operating system. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get started for Backup wireless and LAN drivers. Choose a folder to save your drivers and select OK. Restoring your computer Recovery Management allows you to quickly and easily restore your computer back to its default status. You can choose to keep your files or remove them before reinstalling Windows. Reset this PC and keep my files 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get started to Choose an option. 22 - Recovery3.Select Keep my files to refresh your PC and reinstall your operating system without removing your personal files. Click Next to continue. Important If you have apps installed on your PC, they will be removed. 4.Resetting the PC will reinstall Windows, change settings back to their factory defaults and remove all preinstalled apps and programs without removing your personal files. Click Reset to continue. 5.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 6.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will have been reset back to its factory default settings without removing your personal files. Reset this PC and remove everything 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Recovery - 23 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get Started to Choose an option. 3.Select Remove everything to reset your PC back to its factory default. This process will reinstall your operating system and remove all of your personal files, apps, and settings. 4.Select Just remove my files if you are keeping your computer. This will be quicker, but less secure. Files may still be recovered with a file recovery program. Select Remove files and clean the drive if you are not keeping 24 - Recoveryyour computer. This process will take longer, but will be more secure. Warning Selecting "Remove files and clean the drive" will remove all of your personal files and accounts, along with pre-existing drivers that may affect your Windows installation. 5. Click Reset to continue. 6.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 7.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 8.Follow the process until it completes. 9.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will use factory default settings. Using a Bluetooth connection - 25 USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth- enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following: 1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computer’s USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owner’s manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computer’s Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computer’s Bluetooth adapter, do the following: 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Devices > Bluetooth, and click the toggle under Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 2.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 26 - Using a Bluetooth connection 3.Select the device you wish to pair from the list of discovered devices, and select Pair. 4.A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs (as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000" or "1234"). Consult your device’s user manual for more information. You can also enter the Bluetooth settings by selecting the Notifications icon in the lower right-hand corner of the screen to open the Notifications pane. From here, you can enable or disable Bluetooth or right-click on Bluetooth > Go to settings to enter the Bluetooth settings. Connecting to the Internet - 27 CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET This chapter includes general information on types of connections, and getting connected to the internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 66. Your computer’s built-in network features make it easy for you to connect your computer to the internet. First though, in order to connect to the internet from home, you’ll need to sign up for internet services from an ISP (Internet Service Provider) -- usually a phone or cable company -- that will have to go to your home or office to set up internet service. The ISP will install a small box, a router or modem, that will allow you to connect to the internet. Connecting to a wireless network Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your internet connection itself. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computer’s wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. 28 - Connecting to the Internet To connect to a wireless network, please follow the steps below. 1.Ensure you have a wireless router/access point and current internet connection through the ISP of your choice. Make a note of the wireless network’s name and password (if necessary). If you are trying to connect to a public network (such as at a coffeeshop), make sure you have the wireless network’s name. Note Please refer to your ISP or router documentation for details on connecting to the internet. 2.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 3.Select All settings. 4.Select Network & internet. Connecting to the Internet - 29 5.Make sure Wi-Fi is On and select Show available networks. 6.You will see a list of available wireless networks. Select the one you wish to use. 30 - Connecting to the Internet 7.Once you select a wireless network, select Connect. 8.If required, enter the network’s password. Connecting to the Internet - 31 Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature If your computer has a network port, plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router (refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting to a cellular network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the internet using a cellular phone network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Contact your cellular provider for more information on connecting to the internet using a cellular network. 32 - Bluelight Shield BLUELIGHT SHIELD The Bluelight Shield can be enabled to reduce blue-light emissions from the screen to protect your eyes. To configure the Bluelight Shield, Search for ’Acer Quick Access’ in the Start Menu. From here you can toggle Bluelight Shield on or off, and you can choose from four different modes to fit your needs: No. Item Description 1 Low Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 10% to 25% for basic protection. 2 Medium Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 26% to 45% to protect your eyes. 3 High Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 46% to 65% for maximum protection. 4 Long Hour Mode Professionally tuned to reduce eye strain over an extended period of time. Note Specifications vary depending on model. Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find: • How to secure your computer • Setting passwords • What you need to prepare when you’re traveling • How to get the most out of your battery 34 - Securing your computer SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks — a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a computer security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data: • Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 36. • User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. • Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Securing your computer - 35 Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. • When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. • Type the Supervisor Password and press Enter to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. • When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. • Type the User Password and press Enter to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. 36 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press F2 while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Find Set Supervisor Password and enter a password to enable this feature. Once you have entered a password for this feature, you may then enable/disable Password on Boot. Remember to select F10 to properly save and exit the BIOS utility when you are done making changes. Power management - 37 POWER MANAGEMENT This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of the following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computer’s battery. If you prefer to reduce your computer’s power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup: Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 38 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. Battery pack - 39 BATTERY PACK The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow: 1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 40 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0° C (32° F) or above 45° C (113° F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns: • Using the computer on constant AC power. • Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. • Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below: • Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. • Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. • Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10° C (50° F) to 30° C (86° F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. • Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. • Look after your AC adapter and battery. Battery pack - 41 Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation: Situation Recommended Action The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 42 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories: 1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer: Press the Windows key + C, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or: Traveling with your computer - 43 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing the Sleep hotkey or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press the Sleep hotkey or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home: • Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. • Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 44 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you: • AC adapter and power cord. • The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work: • Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. • If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. • Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10° C (18° F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with your computer - 45 Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you: • AC adapter • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling: • Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. • If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X- ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. 46 - Traveling with your computer Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. What to bring with you Bring the following items with you: • AC adapter. • Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. • Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. • International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally: • When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. • If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in. Ports and connectors... In this section you will find: • Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 48 - Universal Serial Bus (USB) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0 (High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your device’s documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. USB Type-C port - 49 USB TYPE-C PORT A USB Type-C port is a connector that allows you to easily connect USB Type-C peripherals, such as additional storage (e.g. an external drive), or any other compatible device. The Type-C port is reversable; connectors may be inserted with either side up. Note On Acer computers USB Type-C ports support up to USB 3.1 (SuperSpeed USB, 5 Gbps). Other USB or Thunderbolt devices with a USB Type-C connector are supported, but transfer speed may be reduced and certain functions will be disabled (such as Thunderbolt video support). Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 50 - SD card reader SD CARD READER SD (Secure Digital) cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, tablets, media players and cellular phones. Inserting an SD card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows AutoPlay window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Important When removing an SD card, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <card name>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB; SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB; and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB (2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Video and audio connectors - 51 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Add an external monitor to your computer via a video port. The type of port available depends on your computer’s configuration. Connecting a monitor 1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.The correct resolution and refresh rate should be detected automatically. If necessary, change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key ( ) + W, type "Display" and then click on Display. Headphones and microphone One or more 3.5 mm jacks on your computer allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers; connecting an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone; connecting a microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 52 - HDMI HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. Got a question? In this section you will find: • Frequently asked questions • Tips for using Windows 10 • Troubleshooting information • How to protect yourself while online • Where to find Acer service center contact information 54 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Check if power is being supplied to the computer (if your computer has a power indicator, it will be off); if there is no power, check the following: • If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. You may need to wait a few minutes before trying to turn your computer on again. • Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If power is being supplied to the computer, check the following: • Do you have a USB storage device (USB drive, CD drive or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press Ctrl + Alt + Del to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computer’s power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause: • The brightness level might be too low. Use the Brightness up hotkey to adjust the brightness level. • The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey to toggle the display back to the computer. • The computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode (if there is a power LED, it will flash). Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following: • The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) Frequently asked questions - 55 icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. • The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control hotkeys to adjust the volume. • If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. • Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. • Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.If there is a D2D Recovery setting in Main, make sure it is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. 56 - Frequently asked questions Note To access the BIOS utility, press F2 when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Restoring your computer on page 21. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty (ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of- purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information: Name: Address: Telephone number: Machine and model type: Serial number: Date of purchase: Frequently ask Frequently asked questions - 57 Tips and hints for using Windows 10 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button on the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Where’s the Start button? The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Selecting it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select All apps to show a list of installed apps on the computer. How do I turn off my computer? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select the power icon > Shut down. You can also turn off the computer by right-clicking the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. Can I turn off notifications? You can turn off notifications so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > System > Notifications & actions. From here you can enable/disable notifications for all of your apps or choose which apps to enable/disable. How do I unlock my computer? Press the space bar and select a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. 58 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen? You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. From here you can: • Select a background image for the lock screen • Turn the Slide show on or off • Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow? 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. 2.Under Background, select Slideshow. 3.Select Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Select Choose this folder to add the folder to the lock screen slideshow. 4.Select a folder and select Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles? Select a tile and drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups? Yes, you can. Select an existing tile and drag the tile to arrange Start to your liking. Right-click on an app and select Pin to Start to create a new group on Start. From here, you can drag the tile to an existing group on Start. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Can I make tiles bigger or smaller? Yes, you can. Right-click on a tile and select Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. Frequently asked questions - 59 Can I change the screen resolution? Yes, you can. Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and type 'Control Panel' in the text box to display the results; select Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. Alternatively, you can also right-click anywhere on the desktop and select Screen resolution. How do I set the alarm? Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Type ’Alarms’ to search for the Alarms & Clock app. 1.Select an alarm from the list, or select the + in the lower-right corner to create a new alarm. 2.Enter the Alarm name. 3.Set the time by choosing the hour and minute. 4.Select AM or PM. 5.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 6.Select the sound notification. 7.Select the snooze time. 8.Select the Save icon in the bottom right-hand corner to save the alarm. 9.Select On or Off to activate or deactivate the alarm. Hour Minutes Save Delete Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. 60 - Frequently asked questions Where are my apps? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search, start typing the name of the app you would like to open. How do I make an app appear on Start? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, right-click an app and select Pin to Start. How do I remove a tile from Start? Right-click a tile to select it and select Unpin from Start to remove the tile from Start. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, right-click an app or tile and select Pin to taskbar. How do I install apps? You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search. Type the name of the app you would like to open. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to ’Windows Accessories’ to see the list of legacy programs. What is a Microsoft ID (account)? A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Frequently asked questions - 61 Do I need one? You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 10, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one? If you've already installed Windows 10 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Accounts > Sign in with a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I check for Windows updates? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Select Advanced options to configure the settings. Where can I get more information? For more information please visit the following pages: • Windows 10 information: go.acer.com/windows-tutorial • Support FAQs: support.acer.com Frequently asked questions 62 - Frequently asked questions Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips This computer incorporates an advanced design that delivers onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. Error messages If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages Corrective action CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. CMOS checksum error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Disk boot failure Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Enter to reboot. Equipment configuration error Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Hard disk 0 error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 extended type error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. I/O parity error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Frequently asked questions - 63 Error messages Corrective action Keyboard error or no keyboard connected If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Keyboard interface error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Memory size mismatch Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. 64 - Internet and online security INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the internet (see Internet security software on page 68). A comprehensive internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the internet (you may need additional software or a special ‘box’ that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (‘modem’) connector. This allows you to connect to the internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the Internet and online security - 65 internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an ‘always-on’ connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the internet (this requires a ‘micro-filter’ on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an ‘router’ that provides network and Wi-Fi access. CableA cable connection provides fast and always-on internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the internet. Cellular A cellular connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the cellular features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. 66 - Internet and online security Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network? Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following: Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their Internet and online security - 67 services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter Most computers feature a wireless module and Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. You may also turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Search ’HomeGroup’ and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. After take off, ask the cabin crew if you may enable Wi-Fi. Surf the Net! To surf the internet, you need a program called an internet browser. Microsoft Edge provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your internet access installed and you are connected, from the Start Menu, click the Microsoft Edge tile or the icon located in the taskbar and take your internet experience to a new level! Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalized support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads! 68 - Internet and online security Internet security software To help you stay ahead of cybercriminals, Acer has partnered with Norton to offer you security for all your devices. Select Acer computers include protection by Norton Security Norton Security is pre-installed on select Acer computers, protecting your identity and financial data from viruses, spyware, malware and other online threats. Learn more about how to stay safe online and how to stay protected after your introductory subscription ends. Staying ahead of cybercriminals Stay ahead of hackers and cybercriminals by understanding the tactics they use to access your private data. Ensure your software is up to date Cybercriminals rely heavily upon software or platform vulnerabilities, as they are the easiest way to sneak malware into a user's device unnoticed, sometimes with little action on the user's part. Immediately after a software manufacturer announces an update, hackers are ready with malware that can breach holes in the software that would have been patched if the update was installed. How to stay safe: Perform any and all software updates as soon as they are available. Keep a lookout for fake or phishing emails Beware of emails that appear to be from a friend or business colleague that you know but seem a little odd. Maybe they didn't capitalize your name or there are misspellings. The email might be from cybercriminals who are trying to fool you into sending them your credit card number, social security number, or logging into a fake bank website that looks like yours but really isn't. How to stay safe: Use a strong antispam filter. If an email looks strange, don't click on anything and delete it immediately. Instead manually launch a browser and type in your bank's website address and log-in yourself. Don't be fooled if someone calls your phone A tech support scam is a form of online fraud where people call you on the phone saying they're Technical Support from a trusted Internet and online security - 69 company like Norton or Microsoft and that you have a virus. The main motive behind these scams is to extort money from the victim. Cybercriminals can also install malware such as keylogging software or backdoor Trojans in order to gain access to personal information. How to stay safe: Don't fall for phone calls that tell you your software or computer isn't working. Never give your personal information like social security or credit card numbers to someone that you don't know over the phone. Common threats cybercriminals use Now you know a few very common ways cybercriminals try to sneak onto your device or trick you into providing private information to them directly. Here are a few of the types of malware they like to deploy once they've got into a device and what to do if you're ever infected. Ransomware A form of malware that will encrypt personal data files on your computer and attached devices. Encryption converts files into another format, that can only be opened with a specific decryption key. Once the ransomware installs itself, it will display a warning message that the computer is now locked. The user is given a specific amount of money to pay as a "fine" and a timeframe in which to pay. Even if paid, the criminal might choose to not unencrypt the files anyway! What to do if you're infected: Avoid getting infected in the first place by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. Also, perform regular backups of all your data either online or to a separate external hard drive that is only attached to your computer while performing the backup. Ransomware has been known to lock access to external hard drives attached to the computer. If you are infected with ransomware, think twice before you pay the ransom. There is no guarantee the cybercriminal will unlock your files and you'll be funding them to prey upon another innocent victim. Botnets A botnet is a string of infected, connected computers coordinated together to perform a task. Botnets gain access to your machine through some piece of malicious coding. Once the software is downloaded, the botnet will now contact its master computer and let it know that everything is ready to go. Now your computer, phone, 70 - Internet and online security tablet, or IoT device is entirely under the control of the person who created the botnet. Most people who are infected with botnets aren't even aware that their computer's security has become compromised! What to do if you're infected: If you're infected you probably don't realize it as bots are notoriously quiet. Your Internet Service Provider might send you a notification alerting you that they found a threat on your network and that you need to remove the bot. If you have a bot, use internet security software like Norton Security to scan all of your devices. Viruses/Malware "Virus" is the commonplace word for all malicious software programs for years now; however, a virus is just one type of malicious threat. A virus is classified as a self-replicating piece of malicious code that travels by inserting itself into files or programs. What to do if you're infected: Take steps to avoid infection by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. If you subscribed to Norton Security and think you may have a virus, contact Norton's on-call technicians to help eliminate the virus. Take special precautions when using public Wi-Fi Public Wi-Fi is available just about everywhere, from the local coffee shop to the hotels and airports you visit while traveling. While public Wi-Fi has made our lives a little easier, it also poses security risks to the personal information available on our laptops and smartphones. A virtual private network (VPN) gives you online privacy and anonymity by creating a private network from a public internet connection. VPNs mask your internet protocol (IP) address so your online actions are virtually untraceable as well as secure. One of the biggest security risks on public Wi-Fi are man-in-the-middle attacks (MITM). These attacks are akin to eavesdropping. Data is sent from point A (computer) to point B (server/website), and an attacker can get in- between these transmissions. They then set up tools programmed to "listen in" on transmissions, intercept data that is specifically targeted as valuable, and capture the data, such as your login credentials and passwords. Use a virtual private network (VPN) to ensure your privacy and anonymity are protected when you use public Wi-Fi. VPN services Internet and online security - 71 can encrypt all the data that you send and receive while using a public Wi-Fi hotspot, securing your information from hackers and other users of the same connection. For more tips on how to stay safe Good security habits can reduce your exposure to online crime. By adopting a few basic behaviors, you can make big strides in reducing cybercrime risk: • Protect your accounts with strong, unique passwords that use a combination of at least 10 uppercase and lowercase letters, symbols and numbers. • Don't click on random links or open unsolicited messages and attachments-particularly from people you don't know. • Don't access any personal information or social media accounts over unprotected Wi-Fi networks. • Use security software on your devices to help protect yourself from the latest threats. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk? If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-51G (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ACER ASPIRE 5 A515-51G (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: USER’S MANUAL 2 - © 2017. All Rights Reserved. Aspire 5 Covers: A515-51 / A515-51G / A515-41G This revision: April 2017 Sign up for an Acer ID and enjoy great benefits Open the Acer Portal app to sign up for an Acer ID or sign in if you already have an Acer ID. There are three great reasons for you to get an Acer ID: • Create your own connected world. • Get the latest offers and product information. • Register your device for quick, personalized customer support. For more information, please visit the Acer BYOC website: acer.com/byoc-start Important This manual contains proprietary information that is protected by copyright laws. The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Images provided herein are for reference only and may contain information or features that do not apply to your computer. Acer Group shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained in this manual. Model number: _________________________________ Serial number: _________________________________ Date of purchase: ______________________________ Place of purchase: ______________________________ Table of contents - 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS

First things first 5 Your guides ............................................. 5 Basic care and tips for using your computer.................................................. 5 Turning your computer off........................... 5 Taking care of your computer ..................... 6 Taking care of your AC adapter.................. 7 Cleaning and servicing................................ 7 Your Acer notebook tour 8 Screen view............................................. 8 Keyboard view......................................... 9 Left view ................................................ 10 Right view ............................................. 11 USB 3.0 information.................................. 11 Base view ............................................. 12 Using the keyboard 13 Lock keys............................................... 13 Hotkeys..................................................... 13 Windows keys........................................ 14 Using the Precision Touchpad 15 Touchpad gestures................................ 15 Changing touchpad settings.................. 16 Recovery 18 Creating a factory default backup.......... 18 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers.................................................... 21 Restoring your computer ....................... 21 Reset this PC and keep my files............... 21 Reset this PC and remove everything ...... 22 Using a Bluetooth connection 25 Enabling and disabling Bluetooth .......... 25 Enable Bluetooth and add a device .......... 25 Connecting to the Internet 27 Connecting to a wireless network.......... 27 Connecting to a wireless LAN................... 27 Connecting with a cable ........................ 31 Built-in network feature ............................. 31 Connecting to a cellular network ........... 31 Bluelight Shield 32 Securing your computer 34 Using a computer security lock.............. 34 Using passwords ................................... 34 Entering passwords .................................. 35 BIOS utility 36 Boot sequence....................................... 36 Setting passwords ................................. 36 Power management 37 Saving power......................................... 37 Battery pack 39 Battery characteristics ........................... 39 Charging the battery ................................. 39 Optimizing battery life ............................... 40 Checking the battery level......................... 41 Battery-low warning .................................. 41 Traveling with your computer 42 Disconnecting from the desktop ............ 42 Moving around....................................... 42 Preparing the computer ............................ 42 What to bring to meetings......................... 43 Taking the computer home.................... 43 Preparing the computer ............................ 43 What to take with you................................ 44 Special considerations.............................. 44 Setting up a home office ........................... 44 Traveling with the computer................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 45 What to take with you................................ 45 Special considerations.............................. 45 Traveling internationally......................... 45 Preparing the computer ............................ 46 What to bring with you .............................. 46 Special considerations.............................. 46 Universal Serial Bus (USB) 48 USB Type-C port 49 SD card reader 50 Video and audio connectors 51 Connecting a monitor............................. 51 Headphones and microphone................ 51 HDMI 52 Frequently asked questions 54 Requesting service ................................ 56 Tips and hints for using Windows 10..... 57 How do I get to Start? ............................... 57 How do I turn off my computer?................ 57 How do I unlock my computer?................. 57 How do I set the alarm?............................ 59 Where are my apps?................................. 60 What is a Microsoft ID (account)?............. 60 How do I check for Windows updates?..... 61 Where can I get more information?........... 61 Troubleshooting..................................... 62 Troubleshooting tips.................................. 62 Error messages......................................... 62 Internet and online security 64 First steps on the net ............................. 64 Protecting your computer.......................... 64 Choose an Internet Service Provider........ 64 Network connections................................. 66 Surf the Net!.............................................. 67 Internet security software.......................... 68

Getting started... In this section you will find: • Useful information on caring for your computer and your health • Where to find the power button, ports and connectors • Tips and tricks for using the touchpad and keyboard • How to create recovery backups • Guidelines for connecting to a network and using Bluetooth • Information on using Acer’s bundled software First things first - 5 FIRST THINGS FIRST We would like to thank you for making this Acer notebook your choice for meeting your mobile computing needs. Your guides To help you use your Acer notebook, we have designed a set of guides: First off, the Setup Guide helps you get started with setting up your computer. The Quick Guide introduces you to the basic features and functions of your new computer. For more on how your computer can help you to be more productive, please refer to the User’s Manual. This guide contains detailed information on such subjects as system utilities, data recovery, expansion options and troubleshooting. Once you have connected to the internet, you can download updates for your computer from: go.acer.com/?id=17883 1.The link will open the Acer Service & Support webpage. 2.Scroll down to Drivers and Manuals and search for your model by pasting in or manually entering the serial number, SNID, or product model. 3.From this page you can also download and install the Acer identification utility that will automatically detect your computer’s serial number and SNID and allow you to copy it to the clipboard. 4.Once you have found your product model, any updates, or documents will be listed. Basic care and tips for using your computer Turning your computer off To turn the power off, do any of the following: • Use the Windows shutdown command: Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Shut down. 6 - First things first • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. If you need to power down the computer for a short while, but don’t want to completely shut it down, you can put it to Sleep by doing any of the following: • Press the power button. • Press the sleep hotkey. • Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button, select Power > Sleep. • Right-click the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Sleep. Note If you cannot power off the computer normally, press and hold the power button for up to ten seconds to shut down the computer. If you turn off the computer and want to turn it on again, wait at least two seconds before powering up. Taking care of your computer Your computer will serve you well if you take care of it. • Only use the adapter provided with your device, or an Acer- approved adapter to power your device. • Do not expose the computer to direct sunlight. Do not place it near sources of heat, such as a radiator. • Do not expose the computer to temperatures below 0o C (32o F) or above 50o C (122o F). • Do not subject the computer to magnetic fields. • Do not expose the computer to rain or moisture. • Do not spill water or any liquid on the computer. • Do not subject the computer to heavy shock or vibration. • Do not expose the computer to dust or dirt. • Never place objects on top of the computer. • Do not slam the computer display when you close it. • Never place the computer on uneven surfaces. First things first - 7 Taking care of your AC adapter Here are some ways to take care of your AC adapter: • Do not connect the adapter to any other device. • Do not step on the power cord or place heavy objects on top of it. Route the power cord and any cables away from where people walk. • When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the cord itself but pull on the plug. • The total ampere ratings of the equipment plugged in should not exceed the ampere rating of the cord if you are using an extension cord. Also, the total current rating of all equipment plugged into a single wall outlet should not exceed the fuse rating. Cleaning and servicing When cleaning the computer, follow these steps: 1.Turn off the computer. 2.Disconnect the AC adapter. 3.Use a soft, moist cloth. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. If your computer is dropped or visibly damaged, or does not work normally, please contact your nearest authorized Acer service center. 8 - Your Acer notebook tour YOUR ACER NOTEBOOK TOUR After setting up your computer as illustrated in the Setup Guide, let us show you around your new Acer computer. Screen view 12 # Icon Item Description 1 Webcam 3 Web camera for video communication. A light next to the webcam indicates that the webcam is active. 2 Screen with lay-flat hinge Displays computer output. 3 Microphones Internal stereo digital microphones for sound recording. Your Acer notebook tour - 9 Keyboard view 12 3 # Icon Item Description

1 Keyboard For entering data into your computer. See "Using the keyboard" on page 13. 2 Touchpad Touch-sensitive pointing device. The touchpad and selection buttons form a single surface. Press down firmly on the touchpad surface to perform a left click. Press down firmly on the lower right corner to perform a right click.

3 Power button Turns the computer on and off. 10 - Your Acer notebook tour Left view 1 2 3 4 5 6 # Icon Item Description 1 Kensington lock slot Connects to a Kensington-compatible security lock. 2 Ethernet (RJ-45) port Connects to an Ethernet 10/100/ 1000-based network. Pull the lip down to open the port fully. 3 USB Type-C port Connects to USB devices that adopt the USB Type-C connector. Supports USB 3.1 Type-C, Gen 1 with transfer speeds up to 5 Gb/s. 4 HDMI port Supports high-definition digital video connections. 5 USB port with power-off charging Connect to USB devices. 6 SD card reader Accepts one Secure Digital (SD or SDHC) card. Only one card can operate at a time. Your Acer notebook tour - 11 Right view 1 2 34 # Icon Item Description 1 Headset/ speaker jack Connects to audio devices (e.g., speakers, headphones) or a headset with microphone. 2 USB port Connects to USB devices. 3 Power indicator Indicates status. the computer’s power Battery indicator Indicates the computer’s battery status. Charging: The light shows amber when the battery is charging. Fully charged: The light shows blue when in AC mode. 4 DC-in jack Connects to an AC adapter. USB 3.0 information • USB 3.0 compatible ports are blue. • Compatible with USB 3.0 and earlier devices. • For optimal performance, use USB 3.0-certified devices. • Defined by the USB 3.0 specification (SuperSpeed USB). 12 - Your Acer notebook tour Base view 123 4 # Icon Item Description 1 Ventilation and cooling fan Allows the computer to stay cool. Do not cover or obstruct the openings. 2 Houses the computer’s main storage. Main storage compartment You may upgrade your computer’s main storage. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. Memory compartment Houses the computer’s memory. You may upgrade your computer’s mmemory. Acer recommends asking an approved service center to do this. 3 Speakers Deliver stereo audio output. 4 Battery reset pinhole Simulates removing and reinstalling the battery. Insert a paperclip into the hole and press for four seconds. Using the keyboard - 13 USING THE KEYBOARD The keyboard has full-sized keys and a separate numeric keypad, separate cursor, lock, Windows, function and special keys. Lock keys The keyboard has lock keys which you can use to turn keyboard functions on and off. Lock key Description Caps Lock When Caps Lock is on, all alphabetic characters typed are in uppercase. Num Lock Hotkeys The computer employs hotkeys or key combinations to access most of the computer's controls like screen brightness and volume output. To activate hotkeys, press and hold the Fn key before pressing the other key in the hotkey combination. When Num Lock is on, the keypad is in numeric mode. The keys function as a calculator (complete with the arithmetic operators +, -, *, and /). Use this mode when you need to do a lot of numeric data entry. Scroll Lock Fn + F12 When Scroll Lock is on, the screen moves one line up or down when you press the up or down arrow keys respectively. Scroll Lock does not work with some applications. Hotkey Icon Function Description Fn + F3 Airplane mode Turns on / off the computer's network devices. Fn + F4 Sleep Puts the computer in Sleep mode. Fn + F5 Display toggle Switches display output between the display screen, external monitor (if connected) and both. 14 - Using the keyboard Hotkey Icon Function Description Windows keys The keyboard has two keys that perform Windows-specific functions. Key Description Windows key Turns the display screen Fn + F6 Display off backlight off to save power. Press any key to return. Fn + F7 Touchpad toggle Turns the built-in touchpad on and off. Fn + F8 Speaker toggle Turns the speakers on and off. Fn + F12 Scroll Lock Turns Scroll Lock on or off. Fn + Del Insert Turns Insert on or off. Fn + Brightness up Increases the screen brightness. Fn + Brightness down Decreases the screen brightness. Fn + Volume up Increases the sound volume. Fn + Volume down Decreases the sound volume. Fn + Home Play/Pause Play or pause a selected media file. Fn + Pg Up Stop Stop playing the selected media file. Fn + Pg Dn Previous Return to the previous media file. Fn + End Next Jump to the next media file. Pressed alone it returns to the Start screen or to return to the last open app. It can also be used with other keys for special functions, please check Windows Help. Application key This key has the same effect as clicking the right mouse button; it opens the application's context menu. Using the Precision Touchpad - 15 USING THE PRECISION TOUCHPAD The touchpad controls the arrow (or 'cursor') on the screen. As you slide your finger across the touchpad, the cursor will follow this movement. The Precision Touchpad (PTP) is designed to provide a more uniform, smooth, and accurate touchpad experience. Many applications support precision touchpad gestures that use one or more fingers, however, some gestures may not be supported by the specific application or program you are using. Touchpad gestures Single-finger slide Slide a finger across the touchpad to move the cursor. Single-finger press or tap Press the touchpad down, or lightly tap the touchpad with your finger, to perform a 'click', which will select or start an item. Quickly repeat the tap to perform a double tap or 'double click'. Two-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with two fingers to perform a 'right click'. In the Start screen, this will toggle the app commands. In most apps this will open a context menu related to the selected item. Two-finger slide Swiftly scroll through web pages, documents and playlists by placing two fingers on the touchpad and moving both in any direction. Two-finger pinch Zoom in and out of photos, maps and documents with a simple finger-and-thumb gesture. 16 - Using the Precision Touchpad Three-finger press Lightly tap the touchpad with three fingers to open Cortana (if your computer supports Cortana) or open the Action Center (if your computer does not support Cortana). The precision touchpad includes added technology features that help recognize and prevent unintentional gestures such as accidental taps, gestures, and pointer movement. Changing touchpad settings To change the touchpad settings to suit your personal requirements, please do the following. 1.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 2.Select All settings. Three-finger swipe Swipe across the touchpad with three fingers. • Swipe up to open Task View. Move the cursor over a window and tap the touchpad to select that window, or swipe downwards to exit Task View. • Swipe down to minimize all open windows and show Desktop; swipe upwards to restore the minimized windows. • Swipe left or right to switch between open windows. Note The touchpad is sensitive to finger movement; the lighter the touch, the better the response. Please keep the touchpad and your fingers dry and clean. Using the Precision Touchpad - 17 3.Select Devices > Mouse & touchpad. 4.Now you can adjust the settings to suit your personal needs. You can change the primary button for left- or right-handed use, turn the touchpad off if you prefer to use a mouse, or set a delay to prevent the cursor from moving if you accidentally tap the touchpad with your palm while working. Scroll down to see more settings. 18 - Recovery RECOVERY If you are having trouble with your computer, and the frequently asked questions (see Got a question? on page 53) do not help, you can recover your computer. This section describes the recovery tools available on your computer. Acer provides Acer Care Center, which allows you to reset your PC, refresh your PC, or create a factory default backup. Note Acer Care Center is only available with a pre-installed Windows operating system. Important We recommend that you create a Factory Default Backup as soon as possible. In certain situations a full recovery will require a USB recovery backup. Creating a factory default backup Backup allows you to quickly and easily back up your operating system, installed apps and data. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Note Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. Recovery - 19 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get Started for Create Factory Default Backup to open the Recovery Drive window. 3.Make sure Backup system files to the recovery drive is selected and click Next. 4.Plug in the USB drive and wait for the PC to detect the USB drive then click Next. 20 - Recovery• Since the recovery backup requires at least 8 GB of storage after formatting, it is recommended to use a USB drive with a capacity of 16 GB or larger. 5.Everything on the drive will be deleted. Click Create to continue. 6.You will be shown the backup progress on the screen. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.After creating the recovery backup, you can choose to delete the recovery information on your computer. If you delete this information, you can only use the USB recovery backup to restore your computer, if you lose or erase the USB drive, you cannot restore your computer. 9.Unplug the USB drive and label it clearly. Important Write a unique, descriptive label on the backup, such as 'Windows Recovery Backup'. Make sure you keep the backup in a safe place that you will remember. Recovery - 21 Backing up your wireless and LAN drivers Back up your wireless and LAN drivers. You can use these backups to install the wireless and LAN drivers if you install another operating system. 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Backup tab and click Get started for Backup wireless and LAN drivers. Choose a folder to save your drivers and select OK. Restoring your computer Recovery Management allows you to quickly and easily restore your computer back to its default status. You can choose to keep your files or remove them before reinstalling Windows. Reset this PC and keep my files 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get started to Choose an option. 22 - Recovery3.Select Keep my files to refresh your PC and reinstall your operating system without removing your personal files. Click Next to continue. Important If you have apps installed on your PC, they will be removed. 4.Resetting the PC will reinstall Windows, change settings back to their factory defaults and remove all preinstalled apps and programs without removing your personal files. Click Reset to continue. 5.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 6.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 7.Follow the process until it completes. 8.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will have been reset back to its factory default settings without removing your personal files. Reset this PC and remove everything 1.From Start, select All apps then Acer. Select Acer Recovery Management in the list of Acer apps. Recovery - 23 2.Select the Restore tab and click Get Started to Choose an option. 3.Select Remove everything to reset your PC back to its factory default. This process will reinstall your operating system and remove all of your personal files, apps, and settings. 4.Select Just remove my files if you are keeping your computer. This will be quicker, but less secure. Files may still be recovered with a file recovery program. Select Remove files and clean the drive if you are not keeping 24 - Recoveryyour computer. This process will take longer, but will be more secure. Warning Selecting "Remove files and clean the drive" will remove all of your personal files and accounts, along with pre-existing drivers that may affect your Windows installation. 5. Click Reset to continue. 6.You will be shown the reset progress on the screen. The screen will turn off during the reset process. 7.The screen will turn back on when it is installing Windows. Your PC will restart several times during the reset process. 8.Follow the process until it completes. 9.When your PC has completed the reset process, Windows will use factory default settings. Using a Bluetooth connection - 25 USING A BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Bluetooth is a technology enabling you to transfer data wirelessly over short distances between many different types of devices. Bluetooth- enabled devices include computers, cell phones, tablets, wireless headsets, and keyboards. To use Bluetooth, you must ensure the following: 1.Bluetooth is enabled on both devices. 2.Your devices are "paired" (or connected). Enabling and disabling Bluetooth The Bluetooth adapter must be enabled on both devices. For your computer, this may be an external switch, a software setting, or a separate Bluetooth dongle plugged into the computer’s USB port (if no internal Bluetooth adapter is available). Note Please check your devices owner’s manual to determine how to turn on its Bluetooth adapter. Enable Bluetooth and add a device Every new device must first be "paired" with your computer’s Bluetooth adapter. This means it must first be authenticated for security purposes. You only need to pair once. After that, simply turning on the Bluetooth adapter of both devices will connect them. Bluetooth on your computer is disabled by default. To enable your computer’s Bluetooth adapter, do the following: 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Devices > Bluetooth, and click the toggle under Bluetooth to enable/disable it. 2.Your computer will automatically start searching for devices, as well as make itself visible to other devices. 26 - Using a Bluetooth connection 3.Select the device you wish to pair from the list of discovered devices, and select Pair. 4.A code displays on your computer, which should match the code displayed on your device. Select Yes. Then, accept the pairing from your device. Note Some devices using older versions of the Bluetooth technology require both devices to enter a PIN. In the case of one of the devices not having any inputs (as in a headset), the passcode is hardcoded into the device (usually "0000" or "1234"). Consult your device’s user manual for more information. You can also enter the Bluetooth settings by selecting the Notifications icon in the lower right-hand corner of the screen to open the Notifications pane. From here, you can enable or disable Bluetooth or right-click on Bluetooth > Go to settings to enter the Bluetooth settings. Connecting to the Internet - 27 CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET This chapter includes general information on types of connections, and getting connected to the internet. For detailed information, please refer to Network connections on page 66. Your computer’s built-in network features make it easy for you to connect your computer to the internet. First though, in order to connect to the internet from home, you’ll need to sign up for internet services from an ISP (Internet Service Provider) -- usually a phone or cable company -- that will have to go to your home or office to set up internet service. The ISP will install a small box, a router or modem, that will allow you to connect to the internet. Connecting to a wireless network Connecting to a wireless LAN A wireless LAN (or WLAN) is a wireless local area network, which can link two or more computers without using wires. Once connected to WLAN, you can access the internet. You can also share files, other devices, and even your internet connection itself. Your computer's wireless connection is turned on by default and Windows will detect and display a list of available networks during setup. Select your network and enter the password if required. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. All wireless devices must be switched off before boarding an aircraft and during take-off, as they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. You may turn on your computer’s wireless devices only when informed that it is safe to do so by the cabin crew. Acer notebook computers feature an Airplane mode hotkey that turns the network connection on or off. You can use the network management options to turn your wireless network on/off or control what is shared over the network. 28 - Connecting to the Internet To connect to a wireless network, please follow the steps below. 1.Ensure you have a wireless router/access point and current internet connection through the ISP of your choice. Make a note of the wireless network’s name and password (if necessary). If you are trying to connect to a public network (such as at a coffeeshop), make sure you have the wireless network’s name. Note Please refer to your ISP or router documentation for details on connecting to the internet. 2.In the icon tray in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, select the Notifications icon to open the Notifications pane. 3.Select All settings. 4.Select Network & internet. Connecting to the Internet - 29 5.Make sure Wi-Fi is On and select Show available networks. 6.You will see a list of available wireless networks. Select the one you wish to use. 30 - Connecting to the Internet 7.Once you select a wireless network, select Connect. 8.If required, enter the network’s password. Connecting to the Internet - 31 Connecting with a cable Built-in network feature If your computer has a network port, plug one end of a network cable into the network port on your computer, and the other end into a port on your router (refer to the image below.) Then, you'll be ready to get online. Connecting to a cellular network If your computer has a SIM slot, you can connect to the internet using a cellular phone network. To do this, you must have a compatible SIM card and a data contract with your cellular provider. Contact your cellular provider for more information on connecting to the internet using a cellular network. 32 - Bluelight Shield BLUELIGHT SHIELD The Bluelight Shield can be enabled to reduce blue-light emissions from the screen to protect your eyes. To configure the Bluelight Shield, Search for ’Acer Quick Access’ in the Start Menu. From here you can toggle Bluelight Shield on or off, and you can choose from four different modes to fit your needs: No. Item Description 1 Low Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 10% to 25% for basic protection. 2 Medium Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 26% to 45% to protect your eyes. 3 High Reduction Reduces blue light emission from the LED backlit screen by 46% to 65% for maximum protection. 4 Long Hour Mode Professionally tuned to reduce eye strain over an extended period of time. Note Specifications vary depending on model. Keeping your computer and data safe... In this section you will find: • How to secure your computer • Setting passwords • What you need to prepare when you’re traveling • How to get the most out of your battery 34 - Securing your computer SECURING YOUR COMPUTER Your computer is a valuable investment that you need to take care of. Learn how to protect and take care of your computer. Security features include hardware and software locks — a security notch and passwords. Using a computer security lock The computer comes with a computer security slot for a security lock. Wrap a computer security lock cable around an immovable object such as a table or handle of a locked drawer. Insert the lock into the notch and turn the key to secure the lock. Some keyless models are also available. Using passwords Passwords protect your computer from unauthorized access. Setting these passwords creates several different levels of protection for your computer and data: • Supervisor Password prevents unauthorized entry into the BIOS utility. Once set, you must enter this password to gain access to the BIOS utility. See Setting passwords on page 36. • User Password secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. • Password on Boot secures your computer against unauthorized use. Combine the use of this password with password checkpoints on boot-up and resume from Hibernation (if available) for maximum security. Important Do not forget your Supervisor Password! If you forget your password, please get in touch with your dealer or an authorized service center. Securing your computer - 35 Entering passwords When a password is set, a password prompt appears in the center of the display screen. • When the Supervisor Password is set, a prompt appears when you enter the BIOS utility. • Type the Supervisor Password and press Enter to access the BIOS utility. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. • When the User Password is set and the password on boot parameter is enabled, a prompt appears at boot-up. • Type the User Password and press Enter to use the computer. If you enter the password incorrectly, a warning message appears. Try again and press Enter. Important You have three chances to enter a password. If you fail to enter the password correctly after three tries, the system halts. Press and hold the power button for four seconds to shut down the computer. Then turn on the computer again, and try again. 36 - BIOS utility BIOS UTILITY The BIOS utility is a hardware configuration program built into your computer's BIOS. Your computer is already properly configured and optimized, and you do not normally need to run this utility. However, if you encounter configuration problems, you may need to run it. To activate the BIOS utility, press F2 while the computer logo is being displayed. Boot sequence To set the boot sequence in the BIOS utility, activate the BIOS utility, then select Boot from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Setting passwords To set a password on boot, activate the BIOS utility, then select Security from the categories listed on the left of the screen. Find Set Supervisor Password and enter a password to enable this feature. Once you have entered a password for this feature, you may then enable/disable Password on Boot. Remember to select F10 to properly save and exit the BIOS utility when you are done making changes. Power management - 37 POWER MANAGEMENT This computer has a built-in power management unit that monitors system activity. System activity refers to any activity involving one or more of the following devices: keyboard, mouse, hard disk, peripherals connected to the computer, and video memory. If no activity is detected for a period of time, the computer stops some or all of these devices in order to conserve energy. Saving power Disable Fast startup Your computer uses Fast startup to start quickly, but also uses a small amount of power to check for signals to start. These checks will slowly drain your computer’s battery. If you prefer to reduce your computer’s power requirements and environmental impact, turn off Fast startup: Note If Fast startup is off, your computer will take longer to start from Sleep. Your computer will also not start if it receives an instruction to start over a network (Wake on LAN). 1.Open the desktop. 2.Click Power Options in the Notification area. 3.Select More Power Options. 4.Select Choose what the power buttons do. 38 - Power management 5.Select Change settings that are currently unavailable. 6.Scroll down and disable Turn on fast startup. 7.Select Save changes. Battery pack - 39 BATTERY PACK The computer uses an embedded Lithium battery that gives you long use between charges. Battery characteristics The battery is recharged whenever you connect the computer to the AC adapter. Your computer supports charge-in-use, enabling you to recharge the battery while you continue to operate the computer. However, recharging with the computer turned off significantly reduces charge time. The battery will come in handy when you travel or during a power failure. Charging the battery Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and connect to a mains power outlet. Note You are advised to charge the battery before retiring for the day. Charging the battery overnight before traveling enables you to start the next day with a fully charged battery. Conditioning a new battery pack Before you use a battery pack for the first time, there is a conditioning process that you should follow: 1.Connect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery. 2.Turn on the computer and complete setting up the operating system. 3.Disconnect the AC adapter. 4.Operate the computer using battery power. 5.Reconnect the AC adapter and fully charge the battery again. Follow these steps again until the battery has been charged and discharged three times. 40 - Battery pack Use this conditioning process for all new batteries, or if a battery hasn't been used for a long time. Warning Do not expose battery packs to temperatures below 0° C (32° F) or above 45° C (113° F). Extreme temperatures may adversely affect the battery pack. The battery conditioning process ensures your battery accepts the maximum possible charge. Failure to follow this procedure will prevent you from obtaining the maximum battery charge, and will also shorten the effective lifespan of the battery. In addition, the useful lifespan of the battery is adversely affected by the following usage patterns: • Using the computer on constant AC power. • Not discharging and recharging the battery to its extremes, as described above. • Frequent use; the more you use the battery, the faster it will reach the end of its effective life. An embedded battery has a life span of more than 1,000 charge/discharge cycles. Optimizing battery life Optimizing battery life helps you get the most out of battery operation, prolonging the charge/recharge cycle and improving recharging efficiency. You are advised to follow the suggestions set out below: • Use AC power whenever possible, reserving battery for mobile use. • Remove accessories that are not being used (e.g. a USB disk drive), as they can continue to draw power. • Store your PC in a cool, dry place. The recommended temperature is 10° C (50° F) to 30° C (86° F). Higher temperatures cause the battery to self-discharge faster. • Excessive recharging decreases the battery life. • Look after your AC adapter and battery. Battery pack - 41 Checking the battery level The power meter indicates the current battery level. Rest the cursor over the battery/power icon on the taskbar to see the battery's present charge level. Battery-low warning When using battery power pay attention to the power meter. Important Connect the AC adapter as soon as possible after the battery-low warning appears. Data may be lost if the battery is allowed to become fully depleted and the computer shuts down. When the battery-low warning appears, the recommended course of action depends on your situation: Situation Recommended Action The AC adapter and a power outlet are available. 1. Plug the AC adapter into the computer, and then connect to the main power supply. 2. Save all necessary files. 3. Resume work. Turn off the computer if you want to recharge the battery rapidly. The AC adapter or a power outlet is unavailable. 1. Save all necessary files. 2. Close all applications. 3. Turn off the computer. 42 - Traveling with your computer TRAVELING WITH YOUR COMPUTER This section gives you tips and hints to consider when moving around or traveling with your computer. Disconnecting from the desktop Follow these steps to disconnect your computer from external accessories: 1.Save any open files. 2.Remove discs from optical drive. 3.Shut down the computer or put it into Sleep or Hibernate mode. 4.Close the display cover. 5.Disconnect the cord from the AC adapter. 6.Disconnect the keyboard, pointing device, printer, external monitor and other external devices. 7.Disconnect the Kensington lock if you are using one to secure the computer. Moving around When you are just moving within short distances, for example, from your office desk to a meeting room. Preparing the computer Before moving the computer, close and latch the display cover to place it in Sleep mode. You can now safely take the computer anywhere you go within the building. To wake the computer from Sleep mode, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. If you are taking the computer to a client's office or a different building, you may choose to shut down the computer: Press the Windows key + C, click Settings > Power then click Shut Down Or: Traveling with your computer - 43 You can put the computer in Sleep mode by pressing the Sleep hotkey or by closing the display. When you are ready to use the computer again, open the display and, if necessary, press and release the power button. Note The computer may enter Hibernation or Deep Sleep mode after being in Sleep mode for a period of time. What to bring to meetings If your meeting is relatively short, you probably do not need to bring anything with you other than your computer. If your meeting will be longer, or if your battery is not fully charged, you may want to bring the AC adapter with you to plug in your computer in the meeting room. If the meeting room does not have an electrical outlet, reduce the drain on the battery by putting the computer in Sleep mode. Press the Sleep hotkey or close the display cover whenever you are not actively using the computer. Taking the computer home When you are moving from your office to your home or vice versa. Preparing the computer After disconnecting the computer from your desktop, follow these steps to prepare the computer for the trip home: • Check that you have removed all media and compact discs from the drive(s). Failure to remove the media can damage the drive head. • Pack the computer in a protective case that can prevent the computer from sliding around and cushion it if it should fall. Warning Avoid packing items next to the top cover of the computer. Pressure against the top cover can damage the screen. 44 - Traveling with your computer What to take with you Unless you have some items at home, take the following items with you: • AC adapter and power cord. • The printed Setup Guide. Special considerations Follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling to and from work: • Minimize the effects of temperature changes by keeping the computer with you. • If you need to stop for an extended period of time and cannot carry the computer with you, leave the computer in the trunk of the car to avoid exposing the computer to excessive heat. • Changes in temperature and humidity can cause condensation. Allow the computer to return to room temperature, and inspect the screen for condensation before turning on the computer. If the temperature change is greater than 10° C (18° F), allow the computer to come to room temperature slowly. If possible, leave the computer for 30 minutes in an environment with a temperature between outside and room temperature. Setting up a home office If you frequently work on your computer at home, you may want to purchase a second AC adapter for use at home. With a second AC adapter, you can avoid carrying the extra weight to and from home. If you use your computer at home for significant periods of time, you might also want to add an external keyboard, monitor or mouse. Traveling with your computer - 45 Traveling with the computer Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving within a larger distance, for instance, from your office building to a client's office building or traveling locally. Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as if you were taking it home. Make sure that the battery in the computer is charged. Airport security may require you to turn on your computer when carrying it into the gate area. What to take with you Take the following items with you: • AC adapter • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer Special considerations In addition to the guidelines for taking the computer home, follow these guidelines to protect your computer while traveling: • Always take the computer as carry-on luggage. • If possible, have the computer inspected by hand. Airport security X- ray machines are safe, but do not put the computer through a metal detector. Traveling internationally Important Check with your airline for any special requirements for travelling with Lithium batteries. When you are moving from country to country. 46 - Traveling with your computer Preparing the computer Prepare the computer as you would normally prepare it for traveling. What to bring with you Bring the following items with you: • AC adapter. • Power cords that are appropriate for your destination(s). • Additional printer driver files if you plan to use another printer. • Proof of purchase, in case you need to show it to customs officials. • International Travelers Warranty passport. Special considerations Follow the same special considerations as when traveling with the computer. In addition, these tips are useful when traveling internationally: • When traveling in another country, check that the local AC voltage and the AC adapter power cord specifications are compatible. If not, purchase a power cord that is compatible with the local AC voltage. Do not use converter kits sold for appliances to power the computer. • If you are using the modem, check if the modem and connector are compatible with the telecommunications system of the country you are traveling in. Ports and connectors... In this section you will find: • Information on the ports and connectors fitted to your computer 48 - Universal Serial Bus (USB) UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB) The USB port is a high-speed port which allows you to connect USB peripherals, such as a mouse, an external keyboard, additional storage (external hard disks), or any other compatible device. Note Two USB standards are currently available on Acer computers: USB 2.0 (High-speed USB) and USB 3.0 (SuperSpeed USB). USB 2.0 ports on Acer computers have a black tongue in the port, while USB 3.0 ports have a blue tongue. For best performance, USB 3.0 devices should always be plugged into USB 3.0 ports. Consult your device’s documentation to see which standard it supports. You can also charge devices such as tablets, smartphones, or other devices through a USB port. Some USB 3.0 ports support charging devices when the computer is in Hibernate or turned off. Additionally, you can use a USB hub to connect multiple devices to a single USB port. Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. USB Type-C port - 49 USB TYPE-C PORT A USB Type-C port is a connector that allows you to easily connect USB Type-C peripherals, such as additional storage (e.g. an external drive), or any other compatible device. The Type-C port is reversable; connectors may be inserted with either side up. Note On Acer computers USB Type-C ports support up to USB 3.1 (SuperSpeed USB, 5 Gbps). Other USB or Thunderbolt devices with a USB Type-C connector are supported, but transfer speed may be reduced and certain functions will be disabled (such as Thunderbolt video support). Important When removing a USB storage device, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <device>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. 50 - SD card reader SD CARD READER SD (Secure Digital) cards are used in a wide selection of digital cameras, tablets, media players and cellular phones. Inserting an SD card 1.Align the card so that the connector points towards the port, with the connectors facing down. 2.Carefully slide the card into the port. If you find you need to use any force to insert the card, try reorientating the card slightly. 3.Push the card until it clicks into place. A few millimetres of the card will extend from beyond the slot. If the card contains some files, the Windows AutoPlay window may appear (this depends on the contents of the card) and ask you if you wish to use a program to access the contents of the card. Important When removing an SD card, you should right-click on the USB icon in the Windows task bar and select "Eject <card name>" to tell the operating system to stop using the device before removing it. Failure to do this may result in data loss or damage to your peripheral. SD, SDHC and SDXC cards Different types of SD cards cover different capacities, while using the same overall design. SD cards contain up to 4 GB; SDHC cards contain up to 32 GB; and SDXC cards can contain up to 2048 GB (2 TB). Your computer provides an SDHC or SDXC compatible card reader. Note SDXC memory cards can only be used in an SDXC-compatible reader; SD and SDHC cards can be used in either type. Video and audio connectors - 51 VIDEO AND AUDIO CONNECTORS Add an external monitor to your computer via a video port. The type of port available depends on your computer’s configuration. Connecting a monitor 1.Check that the computer is powered off and the monitor power switch is turned off. 2.Attach the video cable to the monitor port on the computer. 3.Connect the monitor power cable and plug it into a properly grounded wall outlet. 4.Follow any setup instructions in the monitor's user's guide. 5.Turn on power to the monitor, then the computer. 6.The correct resolution and refresh rate should be detected automatically. If necessary, change the display settings used by the computer. Note To access the display controls, press the Windows key ( ) + W, type "Display" and then click on Display. Headphones and microphone One or more 3.5 mm jacks on your computer allow you to connect audio devices. Use the headphone port to plug in stereo headphones or powered speakers; connecting an audio device to the headphone port disables the built-in speakers. Use the microphone port to connect an external microphone; connecting a microphone disables the built-in microphone. Note Some computers have a single "combo" port that allows you to use single-pin headsets with a built-in microphone. These headsets are most commonly used with smartphones. 52 - HDMI HDMI HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is a high-quality, digital audio/video interface. HDMI allows you to connect any compatible digital audio/video source, such as your computer, a set-top box, DVD player, and audio/video receiver to any compatible digital audio and/or video monitor, such as a digital television (DTV) with a single cable. The single cable keeps everything neat and tidy while ensuring easy connection and the best audio and visual quality. Got a question? In this section you will find: • Frequently asked questions • Tips for using Windows 10 • Troubleshooting information • How to protect yourself while online • Where to find Acer service center contact information 54 - Frequently asked questions FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS The following is a list of possible situations that may arise during the use of your computer. Easy solutions are provided for each one. I turned on the power, but the computer does not start or boot up. Check if power is being supplied to the computer (if your computer has a power indicator, it will be off); if there is no power, check the following: • If you are using on the battery, it may be low and unable to power the computer. Connect the AC adapter to recharge the battery pack. You may need to wait a few minutes before trying to turn your computer on again. • Make sure that the AC adapter is properly plugged into the computer and to the power outlet. If power is being supplied to the computer, check the following: • Do you have a USB storage device (USB drive, CD drive or smartphone) plugged into your computer? Unplug it and press Ctrl + Alt + Del to restart the system. Nothing appears on the screen. The computer’s power management system automatically blanks the screen to save power. Press any key to turn the display back on. If pressing a key does not turn the display back on, three things might be the cause: • The brightness level might be too low. Use the Brightness up hotkey to adjust the brightness level. • The display device might be set to an external monitor. Press the display toggle hotkey to toggle the display back to the computer. • The computer may be in Sleep or Hibernate mode (if there is a power LED, it will flash). Press and release the power button to resume. No audio is heard from the computer. Check the following: • The volume may be muted. Look at the volume control (speaker) Frequently asked questions - 55 icon in the taskbar. If it is crossed-out, click the icon and deselect the Mute all option. • The volume level may be too low. Check the volume from the volume control (speaker) icon in the taskbar. You can also use the volume control hotkeys to adjust the volume. • If headphones, earphones or external speakers are connected to the headphone jack on the computer, the internal speakers automatically turn off. The keyboard does not respond. Try attaching an external keyboard to a USB port on the computer. If it works, contact your dealer or an authorized service center as the internal keyboard cable may be loose. The printer does not work. • Make sure that the printer is connected to a power outlet and that it is turned on. • Make sure that the printer cable is connected securely to a USB port and the corresponding port on the printer. I want to restore my computer to its original settings. Note If your system is the multilingual version, the operating system and language you choose when you first turn on the system will be the only option for future recovery operations. This recovery process helps you restore the C: drive with the original software content that is installed when you purchased your computer. Warning Your C: drive will be reformatted and all data will be erased. It is important to back up all data files before using this option. Before performing a restore operation, please check the BIOS settings. 1.Check to see if Acer disk-to-disk recovery is enabled or not. 2.If there is a D2D Recovery setting in Main, make sure it is Enabled. 3.Exit the BIOS utility and save changes. The system will reboot. 56 - Frequently asked questions Note To access the BIOS utility, press F2 when you see the Acer logo during boot up. For more information, see Restoring your computer on page 21. Requesting service International Travelers Warranty (ITW) Your computer is backed by an International Travelers Warranty (ITW) that gives you security and peace of mind when traveling. An ITW passport came with your computer and contains all you need to know about the ITW program. A list of available, authorized service centers is in this handy booklet. Read this passport thoroughly. Always have your ITW passport on hand, especially when you travel, to receive the benefits from our support centers. Attach your proof-of- purchase to the ITW passport. If the country you are traveling in does not have an Acer-authorized ITW service site, you can still get in contact with our offices worldwide. Please visit acer.com. Before you call Please have the following information available when you call Acer for online service, and please be at your computer when you call. With your support, we can reduce the amount of time a call takes and help solve your problems efficiently. If there are error messages or beeps reported by your computer, write them down as they appear on the screen (or the number and sequence in the case of beeps). You are required to provide the following information: Name: Address: Telephone number: Machine and model type: Serial number: Date of purchase: Frequently ask Frequently asked questions - 57 Tips and hints for using Windows 10 We know this is a new operating system that will take some getting used to, so we've created a few pointers to help you get started. How do I get to Start? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button on the lower left-hand corner of the screen. Where’s the Start button? The Start button will appear in the desktop taskbar. Selecting it will open Start where you can launch apps. How do I see all of my apps? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select All apps to show a list of installed apps on the computer. How do I turn off my computer? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select the power icon > Shut down. You can also turn off the computer by right-clicking the Windows Start button > Shut down or sign out > Shut down. Can I turn off notifications? You can turn off notifications so that you can leave your computer running, but not be disturbed by notifications. Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > System > Notifications & actions. From here you can enable/disable notifications for all of your apps or choose which apps to enable/disable. How do I unlock my computer? Press the space bar and select a user account icon to unlock the computer. If your account has a password set, you will need to enter the password to continue. 58 - Frequently asked questions Can I personalize the Lock screen? You can personalize the lock screen with a different image, to run a slideshow of images, or to show you quick status and notifications to suit your personal needs. To change the background, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. From here you can: • Select a background image for the lock screen • Turn the Slide show on or off • Select lock screen apps. How do I set up the lock screen slideshow? 1.Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button and select Settings > Personalization. 2.Under Background, select Slideshow. 3.Select Add a folder and open the folder you wish to use (your Pictures folder will open by default). Select Choose this folder to add the folder to the lock screen slideshow. 4.Select a folder and select Remove to remove the folder from the lock screen slideshow. 5.Change the other settings to suit your needs. How do I move tiles? Select a tile and drag it to the place on Start that you want it to appear. Other tiles will be moved to accommodate the tile in its new location. Can I arrange tiles in groups? Yes, you can. Select an existing tile and drag the tile to arrange Start to your liking. Right-click on an app and select Pin to Start to create a new group on Start. From here, you can drag the tile to an existing group on Start. You can give the group(s) a name and arrange the tiles within the groups to suit your needs. Can I make tiles bigger or smaller? Yes, you can. Right-click on a tile and select Resize. Select a size from the menu that appears. Frequently asked questions - 59 Can I change the screen resolution? Yes, you can. Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and type 'Control Panel' in the text box to display the results; select Control Panel > Adjust screen resolution. Alternatively, you can also right-click anywhere on the desktop and select Screen resolution. How do I set the alarm? Your computer can act as an alarm clock. Type ’Alarms’ to search for the Alarms & Clock app. 1.Select an alarm from the list, or select the + in the lower-right corner to create a new alarm. 2.Enter the Alarm name. 3.Set the time by choosing the hour and minute. 4.Select AM or PM. 5.Choose which days the alarm should go off. 6.Select the sound notification. 7.Select the snooze time. 8.Select the Save icon in the bottom right-hand corner to save the alarm. 9.Select On or Off to activate or deactivate the alarm. Hour Minutes Save Delete Note The alarm will only sound if your computer is awake at the set time. 60 - Frequently asked questions Where are my apps? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search, start typing the name of the app you would like to open. How do I make an app appear on Start? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on Start, right-click an app and select Pin to Start. How do I remove a tile from Start? Right-click a tile to select it and select Unpin from Start to remove the tile from Start. How do I make an app appear on my taskbar? If you're in All apps and you want to make an app appear on the taskbar, right-click an app or tile and select Pin to taskbar. How do I install apps? You can download Windows Store apps from Store. You will need to have a Microsoft ID to purchase and download apps from Store. I can't find apps like Notepad and Paint! Where are they? Move your cursor to the lower left-hand corner of the screen and select Search. Type the name of the app you would like to open. Alternatively, open All apps and scroll to ’Windows Accessories’ to see the list of legacy programs. What is a Microsoft ID (account)? A Microsoft account is an email address and password that you use to sign in to Windows. You can use any email address, but it is best if you choose the one you already use to communicate with friends and sign in to your favorite websites. When you sign in to your PC with a Microsoft account, you'll connect your PC to the people, files, and devices you care about. Frequently asked questions - 61 Do I need one? You do not need a Microsoft ID to use Windows 10, but it makes life easier because you can sync data across different machines you sign in to using a Microsoft ID. How do I get one? If you've already installed Windows 10 and didn't sign in with a Microsoft account or you don't have a Microsoft account and want to get one, press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Accounts > Sign in with a Microsoft account, and follow the onscreen instructions. How do I check for Windows updates? Press the Windows key or select the Windows Start button > Settings > Update & recovery > Windows Update. Select Advanced options to configure the settings. Where can I get more information? For more information please visit the following pages: • Windows 10 information: go.acer.com/windows-tutorial • Support FAQs: support.acer.com Frequently asked questions 62 - Frequently asked questions Troubleshooting This chapter shows you how to deal with common system problems. Read it before calling a technician if a problem occurs. Solutions to more serious problems require opening up the computer. Do not attempt to open the computer yourself; contact your dealer or authorized service center for assistance. Troubleshooting tips This computer incorporates an advanced design that delivers onscreen error message reports to help you solve problems. If the system reports an error message or an error symptom occurs, see "Error messages" below. If the problem cannot be resolved, contact your dealer. Error messages If you receive an error message, note the message and take the corrective action. The following table lists the error messages in alphabetical order together with the recommended course of action. Error messages Corrective action CMOS battery bad Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. CMOS checksum error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Disk boot failure Insert a system (bootable) disk, then press Enter to reboot. Equipment configuration error Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. Hard disk 0 error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Hard disk 0 extended type error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. I/O parity error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Frequently asked questions - 63 Error messages Corrective action Keyboard error or no keyboard connected If you still encounter problems after going through the corrective measures, please contact your dealer or an authorized service center for assistance. Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Keyboard interface error Contact your dealer or an authorized service center. Memory size mismatch Press F2 (during POST) to enter the BIOS utility, then press Exit in the BIOS utility to reboot. 64 - Internet and online security INTERNET AND ONLINE SECURITY First steps on the net Protecting your computer It is vital to protect your computer from viruses and attacks over the internet (see Internet security software on page 68). A comprehensive internet security program is offered when you first start your computer. You should activate this protection as soon as possible, certainly before you connect to the internet. Choose an Internet Service Provider Using the internet has become a natural part of daily computing. Just a few simple steps can connect you to a vast collection of knowledge and communication tools. To accomplish these steps you should first select an Internet Service Provider (ISP), which supplies the connection between your computer and the internet. You should research the ISPs available in your region, not forgetting to talk to friends and family about their experiences or to check reviews and consumer reports. The ISP you select will provide instructions on how to connect to the internet (you may need additional software or a special ‘box’ that connects to your phone line). Connection types Depending on your computer model, your location and your communication needs, you have several ways to connect to the internet. Dial-up Some computers include a telephone dial-up (‘modem’) connector. This allows you to connect to the internet using your telephone line. With a dial-up connection, you cannot use the modem and the telephone simultaneously on a single phone line. This type of connection is recommended only if you have limited use of the Internet and online security - 65 internet as the connection speed is low and connection time is typically charged per hour. DSL (e.g. ADSL) DSL (Digital Subscriber Line) is an ‘always-on’ connection that runs over the phone line. As DSL and phone do not use the same frequencies, you can use your telephone at the same time you are connected to the internet (this requires a ‘micro-filter’ on each telephone socket to avoid interference). To be eligible for DSL, you must be located near an DSL-equipped phone exchange (service is sometimes unavailable in rural areas). Connection speeds vary depending on your location, but DSL generally provides very fast and reliable internet connection. As the connection is always-on, it is generally charged at fixed monthly rates. Note A DSL connection requires an appropriate modem. A modem is usually provided by the ISP when you register. Many of these modems include an ‘router’ that provides network and Wi-Fi access. CableA cable connection provides fast and always-on internet service via a cable television line. This service is generally available in large cities. You can use your telephone and watch cable TV at the same time you are connected to the internet. Cellular A cellular connection allows you to use cellular networks (such as those used by a mobile phone) to connect to the internet while away from home. The socket for a SIM card may be built in to your computer, or may require an external device, such as a USB modem or even an appropriately equipped mobile phone. Note If your computer includes a SIM card slot, you require a compatible SIM card and a contract with a cellular provider. Before using the cellular features, check with your service provider to see if any additional charges will be incurred, especially roaming charges. 66 - Internet and online security Network connections A LAN (Local Area Network) is a group of computers (for example, within an office building or home) that share a common communications line and resources. When you set up a network, you can share files, peripheral devices (such as a printer) and an internet connection. You can set up a LAN using wired technologies (such as Ethernet) or wireless technologies (such as Wi-Fi or Bluetooth). Wireless networks A wireless LAN or WLAN is a wireless local area network, which may link two or more computers without using wires. Setting up a wireless network is easy and allows you to share files, peripheral devices and an internet connection. What are benefits of a wireless network? Mobility Wireless LAN systems allow you and other users of your home network to share access to files and devices connected to the network, for example a printer or scanner. Also you can share an internet connection with other computers in your home. Installation speed and simplicity Installing a wireless LAN system can be fast and easy and eliminates the need to pull cables through walls and ceilings. Components of a wireless LAN To set up your Wireless network at home you need to have the following: Access point (router) Access points (routers) are two-way transceivers that broadcast data into the surrounding environment. Access points act as a mediator between wired and wireless network. Most routers have a built-in DSL modem that will allow you access to a high speed DSL internet connection. The ISP (Internet Service Provider) you have chosen normally supplies a modem/router with the subscription to their Internet and online security - 67 services. Read carefully the documentation supplied with your Access point/router for detailed setup instructions. Network cable (RJ45) A network cable (also called RJ45 cable) is used to connect the host computer to the access point (see illustration below); this type of cable may also be used to connect peripheral devices to the access point. Wireless adapter Most computers feature a wireless module and Wi-Fi button that turns the network connection on or off. You may also turn your wireless network on or off, or control what is shared over the network with the network management options. Search ’HomeGroup’ and then click on HomeGroup. Warning Using wireless devices while flying in aircraft may be prohibited. Switch off all devices before boarding an aircraft; they may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt communications, and even be illegal. After take off, ask the cabin crew if you may enable Wi-Fi. Surf the Net! To surf the internet, you need a program called an internet browser. Microsoft Edge provides an easy and secure web browsing experience. As soon as you have your internet access installed and you are connected, from the Start Menu, click the Microsoft Edge tile or the icon located in the taskbar and take your internet experience to a new level! Acer website To get you started why not visit our website, acer.com. Acer is dedicated to provide you with on-going personalized support. Check out our Support section to get help tailored to your needs. acer.com is your portal to a world of online activities and services: visit us regularly for the latest information and downloads! 68 - Internet and online security Internet security software To help you stay ahead of cybercriminals, Acer has partnered with Norton to offer you security for all your devices. Select Acer computers include protection by Norton Security Norton Security is pre-installed on select Acer computers, protecting your identity and financial data from viruses, spyware, malware and other online threats. Learn more about how to stay safe online and how to stay protected after your introductory subscription ends. Staying ahead of cybercriminals Stay ahead of hackers and cybercriminals by understanding the tactics they use to access your private data. Ensure your software is up to date Cybercriminals rely heavily upon software or platform vulnerabilities, as they are the easiest way to sneak malware into a user's device unnoticed, sometimes with little action on the user's part. Immediately after a software manufacturer announces an update, hackers are ready with malware that can breach holes in the software that would have been patched if the update was installed. How to stay safe: Perform any and all software updates as soon as they are available. Keep a lookout for fake or phishing emails Beware of emails that appear to be from a friend or business colleague that you know but seem a little odd. Maybe they didn't capitalize your name or there are misspellings. The email might be from cybercriminals who are trying to fool you into sending them your credit card number, social security number, or logging into a fake bank website that looks like yours but really isn't. How to stay safe: Use a strong antispam filter. If an email looks strange, don't click on anything and delete it immediately. Instead manually launch a browser and type in your bank's website address and log-in yourself. Don't be fooled if someone calls your phone A tech support scam is a form of online fraud where people call you on the phone saying they're Technical Support from a trusted Internet and online security - 69 company like Norton or Microsoft and that you have a virus. The main motive behind these scams is to extort money from the victim. Cybercriminals can also install malware such as keylogging software or backdoor Trojans in order to gain access to personal information. How to stay safe: Don't fall for phone calls that tell you your software or computer isn't working. Never give your personal information like social security or credit card numbers to someone that you don't know over the phone. Common threats cybercriminals use Now you know a few very common ways cybercriminals try to sneak onto your device or trick you into providing private information to them directly. Here are a few of the types of malware they like to deploy once they've got into a device and what to do if you're ever infected. Ransomware A form of malware that will encrypt personal data files on your computer and attached devices. Encryption converts files into another format, that can only be opened with a specific decryption key. Once the ransomware installs itself, it will display a warning message that the computer is now locked. The user is given a specific amount of money to pay as a "fine" and a timeframe in which to pay. Even if paid, the criminal might choose to not unencrypt the files anyway! What to do if you're infected: Avoid getting infected in the first place by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. Also, perform regular backups of all your data either online or to a separate external hard drive that is only attached to your computer while performing the backup. Ransomware has been known to lock access to external hard drives attached to the computer. If you are infected with ransomware, think twice before you pay the ransom. There is no guarantee the cybercriminal will unlock your files and you'll be funding them to prey upon another innocent victim. Botnets A botnet is a string of infected, connected computers coordinated together to perform a task. Botnets gain access to your machine through some piece of malicious coding. Once the software is downloaded, the botnet will now contact its master computer and let it know that everything is ready to go. Now your computer, phone, 70 - Internet and online security tablet, or IoT device is entirely under the control of the person who created the botnet. Most people who are infected with botnets aren't even aware that their computer's security has become compromised! What to do if you're infected: If you're infected you probably don't realize it as bots are notoriously quiet. Your Internet Service Provider might send you a notification alerting you that they found a threat on your network and that you need to remove the bot. If you have a bot, use internet security software like Norton Security to scan all of your devices. Viruses/Malware "Virus" is the commonplace word for all malicious software programs for years now; however, a virus is just one type of malicious threat. A virus is classified as a self-replicating piece of malicious code that travels by inserting itself into files or programs. What to do if you're infected: Take steps to avoid infection by staying protected with internet security software like Norton Security. If you subscribed to Norton Security and think you may have a virus, contact Norton's on-call technicians to help eliminate the virus. Take special precautions when using public Wi-Fi Public Wi-Fi is available just about everywhere, from the local coffee shop to the hotels and airports you visit while traveling. While public Wi-Fi has made our lives a little easier, it also poses security risks to the personal information available on our laptops and smartphones. A virtual private network (VPN) gives you online privacy and anonymity by creating a private network from a public internet connection. VPNs mask your internet protocol (IP) address so your online actions are virtually untraceable as well as secure. One of the biggest security risks on public Wi-Fi are man-in-the-middle attacks (MITM). These attacks are akin to eavesdropping. Data is sent from point A (computer) to point B (server/website), and an attacker can get in- between these transmissions. They then set up tools programmed to "listen in" on transmissions, intercept data that is specifically targeted as valuable, and capture the data, such as your login credentials and passwords. Use a virtual private network (VPN) to ensure your privacy and anonymity are protected when you use public Wi-Fi. VPN services Internet and online security - 71 can encrypt all the data that you send and receive while using a public Wi-Fi hotspot, securing your information from hackers and other users of the same connection. For more tips on how to stay safe Good security habits can reduce your exposure to online crime. By adopting a few basic behaviors, you can make big strides in reducing cybercrime risk: • Protect your accounts with strong, unique passwords that use a combination of at least 10 uppercase and lowercase letters, symbols and numbers. • Don't click on random links or open unsolicited messages and attachments-particularly from people you don't know. • Don't access any personal information or social media accounts over unprotected Wi-Fi networks. • Use security software on your devices to help protect yourself from the latest threats. Protect your computer with Windows security tools Windows provides a variety of protection applications. Windows Updates If you have an active internet connection, Windows can check for important updates for your computer and install them automatically. These updates include security patches and program updates that can improve your computing experience and help protect your computer against new viruses and attacks. How do I know when my computer is at risk? If the Action Center reports an alert, or if your computer behaves erratically, crashes unexpectedly or if some of your programs do not work correctly, your computer may be infected by malicious software. However, do not blame every computer problem on a virus! If you suspect your computer is infected, the first thing to do is update, if you have not already done so, and run your antivirus and anti-spyware software.


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL

ACER LIQUID Z110 (01) PDF MANUAL


Post questions, comments, reviews or errors in the comment box below.

Your File is Ready … Download PDF

CLICK HERE TO DOWNLOAD ACER LIQUID Z110 (01) PDF MANUAL


PDF Content Summary: User’s Manual © 2012 All Rights Reserved Acer Liquid Z110 User’s Manual This revision: 08/2012 Acer Liquid Z110 Smartphone Model number: __________________________________ Serial number: ___________________________________ Date of purchase: ________________________________ Place of purchase: ________________________________ Table of Contents End User License Agreement Getting to know your smartphone Features and functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Product registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Setting Up Unpacking your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Getting to know your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Installing or removing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 Installing a SIM or microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 Using your Smartphone Turning on for the first time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Locking your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 Using the touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 The lock screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 The Home screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15 Managing contacts Managing your contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19 Making Calls Before making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 The voice call screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Voice call options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23 Messaging Creating a new message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25 Replying to a message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26 MMS messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27 Going online Browsing the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Setting up your Google email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Composing an email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Setting up Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29 Maps, Navigation, Places and Latitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30 3 Using the Camera Camera icons and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Taking a photo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Shooting a video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Viewing photos and videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33 Advanced Settings Putting your smartphone in Airplane mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Adjusting settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 Connecting to a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Multimedia playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Restoring to factory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Accessories and Tips Using the headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Using a Bluetooth headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Inserting a microSD Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Appendix FAQ and troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Other sources of help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Warnings and precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Disposal and recycling information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Taking care of your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 4 End User License Agreement IMPORTANT-READ CAREFULLY: THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("AGREEMENT") IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (EITHER AN INDIVIDUAL OR A SINGLE ENTITY), AND ACER INC. INCLUDING ITS SUBSIDIARIES ("ACER") FOR THE SOFTWARE (WHETHER PROVIDED BY ACER OR BY ACER'S LICENSORS OR SUPPLIERS) THAT ACCOMPANIES THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING ANY ASSOCIATED MEDIA, PRINTED MATERIALS AND RELATED USER ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION WHICH MAY BE BRANDED "ACER" ("SOFTWARE"). AGREEMENTS RELATING TO ANY OTHER PRODUCT OR TOPIC ARE NEITHER INTENDED NOR SHOULD THEY BE IMPLIED. BY INSTALLING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE OR ANY PORTION THEREOF, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, DO NOT CONTINUE THE INSTALLATION PROCESS AND IMMEDIATELY DELETE ALL INSTALLED FILES, IF ANY, OF THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE FROM YOUR PHONE. IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A VALIDLY-LICENSED COPY OF THE APPLICABLE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE NOT AUTHORIZED TO INSTALL, COPY OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE, AND HAVE NO RIGHTS UNDER THIS AGREEMENT. The Software is protected by U.S. and international copyright laws and conventions as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties. The Software is licensed, not sold. GRANT OF LICENSE Acer grants to you the following non-exclusive and non-transferable rights with respect to the Software. Under this Agreement, you may: 1. Install and use the Software only on a single designated phone. A separate license is required for each phone on which the Software will be used; 2. Make one copy of the Software solely for backup or archival purposes; 3. Make one hardcopy of any electronic documents included in the Software, provided that you receive the documents electronically. RESTRICTIONS You may NOT: 1. Use or copy the Software except as provided in this Agreement; 2. Rent or lease the Software to any third party; 3. Modify, adapt, or translate the Software in whole or in part; 4. Reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software or create derivative works based upon the Software; 5. Merge the Software with any other program or modify the Software, except for your personal use; and 6. Sublicense or otherwise make the Software available to third parties, except that you may, after prior written notification to Acer, transfer the Software as a whole to a third party so long as you do not retain any copies of the Software and such third party accepts the terms of this Agreement. 7. Transfer your rights under this Agreement to any third parties. 8. Export the Software in contravention of applicable export laws and regulations, or (i) sell, export, re-export, transfer, divert, disclose technical data, or dispose of, any Software to any prohibited person, entity, or destination including, without limitation, Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan and Syria; or (ii) use any Software for any use prohibited by the laws or regulations of the United States. SUPPORT SERVICES Acer is not obligated to provide technical or other support for the Software. ACER LIVE UPDATE Certain of the software contains elements that enable the use of the Acer Live Update service, which allows for updates for such software to be automatically downloaded and installed on your phone. By installing the software, you hereby agree and consent that Acer (or its licensors) may automatically check the version of such software that you are using on your phone and may provide upgrades to such software that may be automatically downloaded on to your phone. OWNERSHIP AND COPYRIGHT Title, ownership rights and intellectual property rights in and to the Software and all copies thereof shall remain with Acer or Acer's licensors or suppliers (as applicable). You do not have or shall not gain any proprietary interest in the Software (including any modifications or copies made by or for you) or any related intellectual property rights. Title and related rights in the content accessed through the Software is the property of the applicable content owner and may be protected by applicable law. This license gives you no rights to such contents. You hereby agree 1. Not to remove any copyright or other proprietary notices from the Software; 2. To reproduce all such notices on any authorized copies you make; and 3. To use best efforts to prevent any unauthorized copying of the Software. TRADEMARKS This Agreement does not grant to you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of Acer or of Acer's licensors or suppliers. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ACER, ITS SUPPLIERS, AND ITS LICENSORS, PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE "AS IS" AND WITH ALL FAULTS, AND HEREBY DISCLAIM ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, DUTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY OR COMPLETENESS OF RESPONSES, OF RESULTS, OF WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, OF LACK OF VIRUSES, AND OF LACK OF NEGLIGENCE, ALL WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT 5 SERVICES. ALSO, THERE IS NO WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF TITLE, QUIET ENJOYMENT, QUIET POSSESSION, CORRESPONDENCE TO DESCRIPTION OR NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH REGARD TO THE SOFTWARE. EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN OTHER DAMAGES TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL ACER, ACER'S SUPPLIERS, OR ACER'S LICENSORS, BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER INFORMATION, FOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, FOR PERSONAL INJURY, FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY, FOR FAILURE TO MEET ANY DUTY INCLUDING OF GOOD FAITH OR OF REASONABLE CARE, FOR NEGLIGENCE, AND FOR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY OR OTHER LOSS WHATSOEVER) ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT SERVICES, OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, EVEN IN THE EVENT OF THE FAULT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF CONTRACT OR BREACH OF WARRANTY OF ACER OR ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS, AND EVEN IF ACER AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND REMEDIES NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES REFERENCED ABOVE AND ALL DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF ACER, ITS SUPPLIERS, AND ITS LICENSORS, UNDER ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT, AND YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ALL OF THE FOREGOING, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AGGREGATE AMOUNT PAID BY YOU FOR THE SOFTWARE. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS AND DISCLAIMERS (INCLUDING DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES AND EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL AND CERTAIN OTHER DAMAGES ABOVE) SHALL APPLY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, THAT BECAUSE SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OR LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. TERMINATION Without prejudice to any other rights, Acer may immediately terminate this Agreement without notice if you fail to comply with any terms and conditions of this Agreement. In such event, you must: 1. Cease all use of the Software; 2. Destroy or return to Acer the original and all copies of the Software; and 3. Delete the Software from all phones on which it was resident. All disclaimers of warranties and limitation of liability set forth in this Agreement shall survive termination of this Agreement. GENERAL This Agreement represents the complete agreement between you and Acer relating to this license for the Software and supersedes all prior agreements, communications, proposals and representations between the parties and prevails over any conflicting or additional terms of any quote, order, acknowledgement or similar communication. This Agreement may only be modified by a written document signed by both parties. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law that provision will be enforced to the maximum extent permissible and the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. ADDITIONAL PROVISIONS APPLICABLE TO THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE AND SERVICES Software provided hereunder by Acer's licensors or suppliers ("Third Party Software") is made available to you for your personal, non-commercial use only. You may not use the Third Party Software in any manner that could damage, disable, overburden, or impair the services provided by Acer's licensors or suppliers hereunder ("Third Party Services"). Furthermore, you may not use the Third Party Software in any manner that could interfere with any other party's use and enjoyment of the Third Party Services, or the services and products of Acer's licensors' or suppliers' third party licensors. Your use of the Third Party Software and Third Party Services is also subject to additional terms and conditions and policies which can be accessed through our global website. Privacy policy During registration you will be asked to submit some information to Acer. Please refer to Acer’s privacy policy at acer.com or your local Acer website. 6 Getting to know your smartphone Features and functions Your new smartphone offers leading, easy-to-access multimedia and entertainment features. You can: • Access your email while on the move. • Connect to the Internet at high speed, via HSDPA (7.2 Mbps), HSUPA (2 Mbps) or Wi-Fi. • Keep in touch with your friends via your Contacts and social networking applications. Product registration When using your product for the first time, it is recommended that you immediately register it. This will give you access to some useful benefits, such as: • Faster service from our trained representatives. • Membership in the Acer community: receive promotions and participate in customer surveys. • The latest news from Acer. Hurry and register, as other advantages await you! How to register To register your Acer product, please visit mobile.acer.com/. Click PRODUCT REGISTRATION and follow the simple instructions. You can also register directly from your smartphone by tapping the Registration icon. After we receive your product registration, you will be sent a confirmation email with important data that you should keep in a safe place. 7 Features and functions Setting Up Unpacking your smartphone Your new smartphone comes packed in a protective box. Carefully unpack the box and remove the contents. If any of the following items is missing or damaged, contact your dealer immediately: • Acer Liquid Z110 Smartphone • Battery • Quick Guide • USB cable • AC adapter • microSD Card Getting to know your smartphone Views 126 4 5 109 7 8 3 11 12 No. Item Description 1 Phone speaker Emits audio from your smartphone; suitable for holding to your ear. 2 Touchscreen 3.5-inch, 320 x 480 pixel capacitive touchscreen to display data, phone content and enter information. 3 Home button Return to the Home screen; press and hold to view recently-used applications, tap an icon to open the associated program. 4 Menu button Open the option menu; press and hold to display the keyboard. 5 Microphone Internal microphone. 6 Back button Go back one menu step; close the keyboard. 7 Power button Press to turn the screen on/off or enter sleep mode; press and hold to turn the smartphone on or off. 8 Unpacking your smartphone No. Item Description 8 3.5 mm headphone jack Connect to stereo headphones. 9 Volume up/down buttons Increase or decrease the phone volume. 10 Camera A 3-megapixel camera for taking high-resolution images. 11 Handsfree speaker Emits audio from your smartphone; suitable for handsfree use. 12 Micro USB connector Connect to a USB cable/charger. Installing or removing the battery Your smartphone uses a replaceable battery to provide power. It is packed separately from your smartphone and needs to be inserted and charged before you can use the smartphone. Installing the battery Insert your fingernail into the cutout between the battery cover and the phone. Unclip the cover and lift off the battery cover. Place the battery into the battery compartment, lining up the battery connectors with those at the bottom of the compartment. Align the tabs on the cover into the slots on the phone. Gently press the cover until it snaps in place.  CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS. Charging the battery For initial use, you need to charge your smartphone for eight hours. After that you can recharge the battery as needed. Connect the AC adapter cord to the micro USB connector on your smartphone. Removing the battery Open the battery compartment as shown in "Installing the battery" on page 9. Lift the battery out of the compartment using the clip on the top of the battery. Replace the battery cover as described above. 9 Installing or removing the battery Installing a SIM or microSD Card To take full advantage of your smartphone’s telephony capabilities, you must install a SIM card. The SIM card holders are located at the bottom of the battery bay. Additionally, you may wish to increase your smartphone’s storage by inserting a microSD Card into the slot provided. This is next to the SIM card slot. 1. Turn off the phone by pressing and holding the power button. 2. Open the cover and remove the battery as

described in "Removing the battery" on page 9. 3. Insert the SIM or microSD Card as shown. 4. Replace the battery and battery cover. Micro SD

Note: Ensure that the microSD Card is inserted all the way into the card slot. Do not use a micro SIM adapter in the SIM slot. Doing so may damage the SIM slot. SIM card lock Your smartphone may come with a SIM card lock, i.e., you will only be able to use the SIM card provided by your network operator. To cancel the SIM lock, contact your network provider. 10 Installing a SIM or microSD Card Using your Smartphone Turning on for the first time To turn on your smartphone for the first time, press and hold the power button until the screen turns on. You will then be asked to configure some settings before you can use your smartphone. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete setup. Sign in to or create a Google account If you have Internet access, your smartphone allows you to synchronize information with a google account. During the start-up process, you may create or sign in to your account, which will be used to synchronize your contact list, email, calendar and other information. If you do not yet have Internet access, or do not want to use this feature, then tap Skip. Creating multiple Google accounts You can create and easily access multiple Google accounts. Tap Settings > Accounts & sync > Add account. Entering your PIN When you install a SIM card for the first time, you may need to enter a PIN using the onscreen number pad. Important: Depending on your settings, you may be required to enter your PIN each time you switch on the phone function. Activating a new SIM card If you are using your SIM card for the first time, it may require activation. Contact your network operator for details on how to do this. Locking your smartphone If you will not use your smartphone for a while, briefly press the power button to lock access. This saves power and ensures your smartphone does not unintentionally use any services. Your smartphone will lock automatically if it is not used for one minute. 11 Turning on for the first time Waking your smartphone If the screen is off and the smartphone does not react to any taps on the screen or front panel button, then it has been locked and is in sleep mode. Press the power button to wake your smartphone. Your smartphone will display the widgets screen. Unlock your smartphone by dragging the peel up or to the right. For additional security, you may set an unlock pattern, a set of dots that must be tapped in the correct order to access the phone. Tap Settings > Security > Set up screen lock.  Note: If you forget your unlock pattern, please refer to "Unlock pattern" on page 41. Using the touchscreen Your smartphone uses a touchscreen for selecting items and entering information. Use your finger to tap the screen. Tap: Touch the screen once to open items and select options. Drag: Hold your finger on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images. Tap and hold: Tap and hold an item to see a list of actions available for that item. On the pop-up menu that appears, tap the action you want to perform. Scroll: To scroll up or down the screen, simply drag your finger up or down the screen in the direction that you want to scroll. Android keyboard This is a standard onscreen QWERTY keyboard that allows you to enter text. Tap and hold a key with numbers at the top to select alternative characters, such as letters with accents. Tap the ?123 button to see numbers and special characters, and then tap the ALT key to see even more. You can switch between multiple input languages by swiping across the space bar. The keyboard layout will change accordingly. To select your preferred languages, tap Menu > Settings > Language & keyboard > Android keyboard > Input languages. 12 Using the touchscreen Text assistance The Android keyboard has various features that assist you to enter correct text. Tap Menu > Settings > Language & keyboard > Android keyboard. From here you can enable or disable the following: Function Description Quick fixes Corrects commonly typed mistakes. Show suggestions Shows suggested words while you are typing. Auto-complete Inserts the suggested word whenever you tap space or a punctuation mark. Swype Swype is a fast way to enter text. It allows you to type with one continuous motion across the screen keyboard; you create a word by drawing through letters. Put your finger on the first letter of the word and draw a path from letter to letter, lifting up only after the last letter. Swype will insert spaces where necessary. Swype will usually add a double letter in a word when needed, but you can help Swype recognize you want a double letter by scribbling slightly or making a loop on the letter. For example, to get the "ll" in "hello", scribble (or make a loop) on the "l" key. When there are multiple suggestions for the word you want to enter, Swype displays a Word Choice List. To accept the default word in the Word Choice List, just keep Swyping. Otherwise, scroll through the list by dragging your finger, and tap the word you want. Tap the Swype key to turn the ability to draw words on or off. Press and hold the Swype key to access settings, help, and to change input methods. Tap the +!= button to see numbers and special characters; tap the page (shift) key to see even more. Additional keys vary depending on the type of text you enter, e.g. a key to add a smiley is available when typing a text message. Like other keys, tap and hold for additional options. 13 Using the touchscreen Text assistance The Swype keyboard has various features that assist you to enter correct text. In the Application menu, tap Settings > Language & input > Swype. You can also tap and hold the Swype key . From here you can enable or disable the following: Function Description How to Swype Learn how to use the Swype keyboard. Preferences Change your text input preferences. Language Options Changing the text input method To change the input method, tap and hold a text box. Tap Input method, and then select your preferred input method. Predictive text The Android keyboard provides predictive text input. As you tap the letters of a word, a selection of words are displayed above the keyboard that continue the sequence of letters tapped, or are a close match allowing for errors. The word list changes after every key press. If the word you need is displayed, you can tap on it to insert it into your text. Set the language used by the keyboard. Swype Connect • Add contact names and words used in posts to your personal dictionary. • Change data settings. Personal dictionary Check words added you your personal dictionary. Updates Check for application and dictionary updates. The lock screen When you start your smartphone, or wake it from power saving, it will display the lock screen. This screen protects your smartphone from accidental access. 14 The lock screen Recent apps To access recently opened apps while working on another process, press and hold the home button. The Home screen After rebooting, your smartphone will display the home screen. This screen gives you quick, icon-based access to many of the frequently used features of your smartphone. At the bottom of the screen is the application dock which displays default applications. Tap an icon to open the application. Tap to open the applications menu. The extended Home screen The Home screen extends to either side of the screen, giving you more room to add icons, widgets or features. To view the extended screen, slide your finger to the left or right. Adding or removing icons You can set icons for installed applications on the Home screen. Tap and hold an icon in the Applications menu to copy it to the Home screen. To remove an icon from the Home screen, tap and drag the icon from the Home screen to the trash tab that appears at the bottom of the screen. 15 The Home screen Adding or removing shortcuts or widgets To add shortcuts or widgets, press the menu button while in the Home screen, and tap Add, or tap and hold anywhere on the Home screen to open the Add to Home screen menu. Tap Shortcuts to open a list of quick links to applications and settings you can add to the Home screen. Tap Widgets to open a list of small applications that you can add to your Home screen. Widgets are handy applications that you can add to your Home screen to display various information. You can also add folders to your Home screen. There are some pre-defined folders available or you can add a New folder. This will be placed on your Home screen and named Folder. To change the name of the folder, tap to open it. Tap and hold the name bar at the top of the folder window to open a dialog box that will allow you to rename the folder. Tap Wallpapers to change the current wallpaper. You can choose from images stored in the Gallery, or Live wallpapers featuring animated or interactive backgrounds, or standard wallpapers. Multitasking You can have multiple applications open at the same time. To open a new application, press the Home button to return to the Home screen, then start the new application. 16 The Home screen To view your active applications, press and hold the Home button. Then tap an icon to go to the application. Tip: To prolong battery life, it is better to close an application when you’ve finished using it. Do this by either pressing the Back key or the Menu button and selecting Exit (if available). The applications menu The applications menu displays groups of applications in a series of pages. The number of pages is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Drag the menu to the left or right to switch pages. Tap and hold an icon to move or delete it; you may change the order of icons or reorganize the pages to suit your needs. Drag an icon to the edge of the screen, or one of the page numbers, to change the page. Notification area The Notification area is at the top of the screen. This area contains a variety of icons to inform you of your phone’s status. The left side of the Notification area displays event icons that indicate a new event (such as a new message). The icons on the right side indicate signal strength, connection, battery status and the time. Drag the Notification area down the screen, or tap the area, to view more information about new events. You can also use the slide bar to switch between pages. Icon Description An alarm has been set. New/unread message. Incoming call or active call. 17 The Home screen Icon Description Missed call. Wi-Fi signal strength. Bluetooth enabled. Vibrate mode enabled. Cellular signal strength. Airplane mode: Wireless signals disconnected. Disable airplane mode before trying to make a call. SIM card not installed/error. 18 The Home screen Managing contacts Managing your contacts Your smartphone features an address book that allows you to save contacts to either the internal memory or onto your SIM card. Tap Contacts from the Home screen or the Contacts tab from the Dialer to view your contacts. If you don’t have any contacts stored on your phone, you can import your Google account contacts, add a new contact or import contacts from your SIM or SD card. Tap to search for a contact, or press the Menu button to open the menu. Adding a contact Icon Description Add a new contact. View groups of contacts or SIM contacts. Search for a contact. Tap New contact to add a new contact. You may also scan a person’s profile barcode to add the person to your contact list or group. To create a contact, you will be asked to enter the contact’s: • Given and Family name. • Phone numbers. • Email addresses. • IM addresses. • Postal addresses. You may also: • Enter information such as organizations the contact belongs to. • Add any personal notes about the contact. 19 Managing your contacts to add a contact, • Enter a nickname. • Link a website. • Assign the contact to a group • Assign a ringtone • Divert calls from the contact to voicemail To assign an image to your contact, tap the silhouette and select whether to take a photo or select an image from your smartphone’s picture gallery. Tip: You may also create a contact from an already dialed or received number, see "Saving a dialed number to contacts" on page 22. 20 Managing your contacts Making Calls This chapter shows you how to make phone calls, and the various options available to you during your call. Before making a call Check that the phone function is on before you make a call. You can confirm the phone status from the icon on the right-hand side of the Notification area. Icon Description Connected to the network: You may make a call. Airplane mode: Wireless connectivity disconnected (Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, 2G and 3G). Please disable airplane mode before trying to make a call. Making a call Note: The phone function needs to be enabled before the call can be connected. 1. From the Home screen tap Phone to open the onscreen number pad. 2. Enter the number you wish to dial. 3. Tap to make the call. 4. To end the call, tap End. Dialing an international number When dialing international numbers, there is no need to enter the international direct dialing prefix (‘00’ etc.) before the country code. Simply tap and hold 0+ on the onscreen number pad until + appears onscreen. Warning: International call rates can vary greatly depending on the country you are calling and your network provider. We suggest you check all call rates with your network provider, to avoid excessive phone bills. If you are using your smartphone abroad, roaming charges will apply. Consult your network provider for roaming rates specific to the country you are visiting before you leave. Smart search Smart search allows you to quickly find a contact from the phone keypad. As you enter a number, if it is already known, it will find appropriate contacts and display them in the list above the keypad. Also, instead of typing a phone number, you may enter the contact name using the predictive text letters (2 for ‘a’, ‘b’ or ‘c’; 3 or ‘d’, ‘e’ or ‘f’; etc.). If the letter combinations match a contact name, it will be displayed. 21 Before making a call If the contact you need is displayed, simply tap the contact name to make a call. Dialing a number from the call log Your call history can be viewed by tapping the Call log tab. It displays recent received, dialed, and missed calls. Tap a number to redial. To view details of the call, tap . You may also tap and hold the number to open a menu with other options: Call <the number>; Edit number before call; Send text message; Add to contacts or Remove from call log. Saving a dialed number to contacts You can save a number you have dialed to your contacts for future use. 1. Tap the Call log tab in the phone application, or Contacts from the Home screen, to view your contacts. 2. Select the number from the Call log tab, and tap Add to contacts. Making a call to one of your contacts 1. Tap the Contacts tab in the onscreen number pad or Contacts from the Home screen to view your contacts. 2. Tap a contact. A dialog will open, asking if you want to View contact, Call contact, Text contact, Edit contact, Send contact, or Delete contact. Speed Dial You may add a contact to a Speed Dial number on the phone keypad. Open the Phone tab, then tap and hold any number from 2 through 9 (1 is reserved for the voicemail service). Select OK, then select a contact from the list. If the contact has more than one phone number, select the number to use. If a key has a speed dial contact defined, it will show a small contact image as a reminder. Tap and hold the key to call the speed dial number. If you want to remove or change a speed dial number, tap Menu and select Speed dial. Tap an entry to remove or change the assigned telephone number. The voice call screen Once you have dialed your number the voice call screen appears, which displays the number/contact you are talking to, the call duration and the dialpad tab. 22 The voice call screen Answering or declining a call When you have an incoming call, the number will be shown on the screen. To accept or decline the call, tap the appropriate button. Ending a call To end a call, press End from the voice call screen. Voice call options Using the speakerphone The speakerphone function allows you to make calls without having to hold your smartphone. This handsfree function is especially useful for multitasking. To activate the speakerphone, tap Speaker. Tap Speaker again to disable the speakerphone. Accessing the keypad To access the keypad while in a call, tap the dialpad icon . Tap Back to return to the voice call screen. Accessing your phonebook To access your phonebook while in a call, tap Contacts . Muting a call To mute a call, tap Mute on the voice call screen to switch off the microphone. Tap Mute again to switch the microphone back on. Putting a call on hold To put a call on hold, tap Hold . To return to the call, tap Unhold. Conference calls If you have one call on hold and another online, you can combine both calls to create a conference call. After the first call is established, tap Add call to add a second call. When both calls are connected, tap Merge calls 23 Voice call options to start the conference call. Viewing missed calls Missed calls will be displayed by the call indicator in the Notification area with the

icon .

You can also view missed calls from the Notification area. 1. Open the notification list by tapping the Notification area to display the details of the missed calls. 2. Select the call from the list to enter the Call log. You can save phone numbers to your Contacts from the Call log. Please refer to "Adding a contact" on page 19 for further details. 24 Voice call options Messaging This chapter shows you how to set up and use the Phone messages, Social messages and Social events functions of your smartphone. All SMS and MMS messages are accessed via Messaging. Messaging automatically arranges received and sent messages into threads. To access Messaging tap Messaging from the Applications menu. Creating a new message You can use your phone to compose Phone (SMS and MMS) messages. Tap Compose new message to compose a new message. Tap the Menu button and select Contacts, or enter the recipient’s phone number or name in the To field. Suggested contacts will be displayed in a drop-down list below the text field. To select a suggested contact, tap the contact’s name. You can also select from your contact Once you have entered the recipient, enter your message in the text box labeled Type to compose. Note: SMS messages may be up to 160 characters long. If your message is longer than 160 characters, it will be sent as multiple linked messages. Most phones will automatically join the linked messages to present the recipient with a single long message, however, some older phones do not have this ability. Press the Menu button to see what options are available when creating a new message. The options change depending on the status of the message. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Item Description 1 Convert the SMS to an MMS, allowing you to add a subject to the message. 2 Convert the SMS to an MMS, allowing you to attach a file to the message. 25 Creating a new message 3 Discard the message. 4 Insert a pre-defined message. 5 Insert a smiley/emoticon into your message text. 6 See more options: • Insert contact • All threads Replying to a message When a new text message arrives a message icon appears in the Notification area and the message icon on the top of the phone lights up. Tap Messaging on the Home screen to view the message list or expand the Notification area to see a summary of the message. Tap the summary to open the message list. To reply to an SMS or MMS message, open the message from the message list. Enter your text in the text box labeled Type to compose. Press the Menu button to see available options. Item Description 1 Open the Dialer to call the recipient. 2 Convert the SMS to an MMS, allowing you to add a subject to the message. 3 Convert the SMS to an MMS, allowing you to attach a file to the message. 4 Delete the message. 5 Insert a pre-defined message. 6 Insert smiley; Insert contact; view All threads; add sender to Contacts. 26 Replying to a message Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 MMS messages MMS messages are similar to text messages but also allow you to attach multimedia files such as pictures, audio or video clips. Each MMS message can be up to 300 kB in size. Note: You need to set up an MMS profile before you can send MMS messages. Normally, your smartphone will set up the profile for you based on information retrieved from your provider. Tip: Ask your network provider for the necessary information if you need to manually set up the MMS profile. Receiving MMS messages When a new MMS message arrives, a message icon appears at the top of the screen and a notification message is displayed. 1. Open Messaging to view a summary of the message. 2. Tap Download to download the message content. Note: Downloads can take a long time, depending on your connection quality. If you reply or open another application, the download will be stopped. Important: You may be charged to download message content, especially if you are roaming. Please contact your provider if you have any questions. 3. Tap the message to view the content. 4. To reply to the message, enter your text in the text box labeled Type to compose and tap Send. Simple text replies will be sent as SMS messages. If you wish to attach a file, press the Menu button and tap Attach. You will be presented with a menu of options. 5. When you have finished composing the message, press the Menu button and tap Send. 27 MMS messages Going online Browsing the Internet In order to browse the Internet with your smartphone, you must be connected to a data (3G) or wireless network. Using the browser Tap Browser on the Home screen to start browsing. To open a new website, tap the address box at the top of the page. Enter the address using the keyboard and tap Go. To view your browsing history or frequently visited sites, open the browser then press and hold the back button. You may open multiple pages. When a page is open, press the Menu button and tap Windows > New window from the menu that opens. You can zoom in or out of pages using the zoom bar that appears when you tap the screen. Tap and hold an item on a page to open a contextual menu. Voice Search Note: Voice search is available only in some regions. With voice actions, you can send text messages, place calls, send emails, find directions of establishments, automatically call establishments, search the Internet and even send a note to yourself using your voice. Open Voice Search from the 28 Browsing the Internet Applications menu, or press and hold the Search button. Press and hold the Search button again to display the “Speak now” prompt, and state your command. Setting up your Google email 1. Make sure your smartphone is connected to a data or Wi-Fi connection. 2. From the Applications menu tap Gmail. If you did not enter your Gmail account address and password when you first started your phone, follow the on screen instructions. Composing an email 1. Make sure your smartphone is connected to a data or Wi-Fi connection. 2. From the Home screen tap Gmail. 3. Press the Menu button and then tap Compose. 4. Enter the recipient's email address, the subject and message. 5. When you are finished composing your message, tap Send. Setting up Email Your smartphone enables you to access your email. Most popular ISPs can be set up in two steps. Tap Email to start setting up your email account. If necessary, enter your email address and tap Manual setup to enter the parameters manually. Tap Next to finish the setup process.  29 Setting up your Google email Play Store Note: The Play Store may not be available in all countries and regions. You need to have a Google account set up and active on your phone before you can use the Play Store. The Play Store allows you to obtain a variety of add-on programs and applications to enhance the functionality of your smartphone. The first time you access the Play Store, you will need to read and accept the Terms of Service. You can browse the market by category or tap the search icon to search for a specific application. Once you have selected an application, tap the Install button to download and install the application. You will be told which services on your phone that the application has access to. Tap OK to proceed with the installation. You may keep track of the download progress from the Notification Area. Important: Some applications may require payment before you can download them. You will need to have a Google Wallet in order to pay for these applications. Uninstalling downloaded applications Once you’ve downloaded and installed an application, you may uninstall the application by tapping Settings from the Applications menu. Select Applications > Manage applications. Tap the application you wish to uninstall and tap Uninstall. Maps, Navigation, Places and Latitude Get easy-to-follow directions using Maps, view real-time traffic conditions and navigate by using spoken, turn-by-turn driving instructions with Navigation, view where your friends are and places of interest and local businesses on Maps using Places and Latitude. Important: Maps does not have information about every location. Using maps Tap the Maps icon in the applications menu. Drag the map with your finger to move the map around. To zoom in or out: 1. Tap the plus or minus signs on the lower right corner, or 2. Double tap a location on the map to zoom in on the location, and tap once to zoom out, or 3. Touch an area with two fingers at once and spread them apart to zoom in, and pinch them together to zoom out. Important: Not all zoom levels are available for all locations. 30 Maps, Navigation, Places and Latitude Using the Camera Your smartphone features a digital camera mounted on the rear. This section will take you through all the steps in taking photos and videos with your smartphone. Note: You need to have a microSD Card inserted into the microSD slot before using the camera. To activate the camera, open the applications menu and tap Camera. Camera icons and indicators 12345 In the camera window, the icons on the right allow you to control the camera. Use the zoom slider at the left of the screen to adjust the zoom. Item Description 1 Opens Gallery 2 Set the camera mode. • Normal • Panorama • Camcorder • Auto scene detection 3 Shutter button. 4 Set photo mode. • Normal • Smile chot • Burst shot 5 Change camera settings. • Image properties • Color effect • Image data • Settings 31 Camera icons and indicators The number in the lower right-hand corner shows how many more photos can be stored, or the maximum duration for a video. Taking a photo 1. Ensure you have adjusted the parameters described above. 2. Frame your subject and steady your smartphone. 3. Zoom in or out as needed by using the zoom slider on the left-hand side of the screen. 4. Tap the shutter button to take the photo. Shooting a video Turn on camcorder mode by tapping the mode icon and then Camcorder. 1. Ensure you have adjusted the parameters described above. 2. Frame your subject and steady your smartphone and zoom in or out as needed. 3. Tap the shutter button to begin recording. 4. Tap the shutter button again to stop recording. Supported formats Type Formats Image JPEG Video MPEG-4, H.263 32 Taking a photo Viewing photos and videos After you have taken your photo or video, it is automatically saved. Once you have taken a photo or video, you can view it in Gallery by tapping the thumbnail icon in the upper right corner. Alternatively, open the applications tab and tap Gallery. From Gallery you can share the file directly using various services. Note: Share options vary depending on the file type. 33 Viewing photos and videos Advanced Settings Putting your smartphone in Airplane mode You can enter Airplane mode (also known as flight mode) to turn off telephone and Bluetooth functions and use your smartphone as a handheld device during a flight. Check with your airline to make sure this is permitted onboard. Switch your smartphone off during takeoff and landing as it may interfere with aircraft electronic systems. Turning Airplane mode on or off 1. Press and hold the power button until you get the phone options menu. 2. Tap Airplane mode to switch it ON or OFF. Note: When Airplane mode is active, the icon will be displayed in the Notification area. Adjusting settings This section will show you how to adjust detailed settings for your phone, data, Wi-Fi and Bluetooth connections. Activating or deactivating connections Open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Wireless & networks to manage your connection settings. Each connection will have a green check when turned on. Item Description Airplane mode Disable all wireless connections so you can safely use this device onboard an aircraft. WLAN Turn the Wi-Fi function on or off. WLAN settings Set up and manage your wireless access points. Bluetooth Turn the Bluetooth function on or off. Bluetooth settings Manage your Bluetooth connections, set a device name and discoverability.

Tethering & portable hotspot Share your phone’s mobile data connection via USB or as a portable Wi- Fi hotspot.

VPN settings Set up and manage Virtual Private Networks. Mobile networks Set your options for connecting to mobile networks. 34 Putting your smartphone in Airplane mode Important: If your phone is in Airplane mode, the option to turn Bluetooth on will be disabled. Please refer to "Putting your smartphone in Airplane mode" on page 34 for instructions on turning Airplane mode on or off. Adjusting Bluetooth settings You can use Bluetooth to exchange information between your smartphone and other mobile devices. Bluetooth connections For all Bluetooth settings, open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Wireless & networks > Bluetooth settings. Here you can switch Bluetooth on or off, set a device name and discoverability. Tap Scan for devices to scan for available devices. To connect to a device, tap the device in the list of available devices. You may be asked to enter a PIN on both devices to establish the connection. Internet sharing Tethering via USB If you wish to share your mobile Internet connection with a computer, you can connect your phone to a PC using the supplied USB cable. 1. Plug the USB sync cable into the micro USB connector on your smartphone. 2. Plug the USB client connector into an available USB port on your computer. 3. Tap Settings > Wireless & network > Tethering & portable hotspot and then tap USB tethering. Wi-Fi hotspot You can turn your smartphone into a portable Wi-Fi hotspot to share your mobile Internet connection with up to 8 clients. 1. Tap Settings > Wireless & network > Tethering & portable hotspot > Portable WLAN hotspot settings 2. Tap Configure WLAN hotspot. 3. Set the Network SSID and adjust security between Open and WPA2 PSK. Tap Save to finish. Note: When your smartphone is serving as a Wi-Fi hotspot, you can’t use your phone’s applications to access the Internet via its Wi-Fi connection. Phone network settings Tap Mobile networks to adjust your network settings. You can turn data connection on or off when roaming, restrict the connection to 2G networks only, specify a network operator and define access point names. 35 Adjusting settings Selecting a network Your phone will automatically detect your carrier/network settings when you insert a new SIM card. However, you may prefer to manually select a network. This may be a good idea when roaming. Tip: When you are traveling, manually selecting a network may help to reduce your roaming charges. Check with your home service provider for the network offering the most competitive rates at your destination. 1. Open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Network operators. 2. Your phone will search for available networks. 3. Select your preferred network from the list generated. You phone will attempt to register on the selected network. 4. Tap Select automatically to connect to the available network with the strongest signal. This may lead to your phone jumping between networks when you move around. Note: Contact your service provider should you have any problems obtaining voice mail and the text message service center numbers. Sound You can adjust your phone settings by tapping Settings > Audio profiles. Here you may select a profile to suit your needs, or tap the Menu button to Add your own profile. Display You can adjust your phone display settings by tapping Settings > Display. Item Description Brightness Adjust screen brightness. Auto-rotate screen Enable rotation of the screen when device is tilted. Animation Enable window animations. Screen timeout Adjust the delay before the screen automatically turns off. Phone settings Many phone settings are automatically configured by your smartphone when you insert a SIM card. The device will communicate with your provider and automatically obtain all necessary settings, such as network name, voice mail and text message center numbers. You can also view and modify these settings manually through the Phone Settings screen. Open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Call settings. 36 Adjusting settings Connecting to a PC If you wish to transfer information between the microSD Card in your phone and your computer, you can connect your phone to a PC using the supplied USB cable. Plug the USB sync cable into the micro USB connector on your smartphone. Plug the USB client connector into an available USB port on your computer. Pull down the notification bar, and swipe to the right to open the USB tab. Tap the On button next to Use as a USB drive. You will now be able to see the microSD Card in your phone as a drive in your computer’s file explorer.  Note: After turning on USB storage, you will not be able to access the files in the microSD card or applications such as Gallery or Music. Synchronization You can sync your calendar, email and contacts on your phone and never worry about losing them again. Sync in real time or adjust it as you please. Tap Menu > Settings > Accounts & sync to access the synchronization settings. To have your smartphone auto-sync, make sure Background data and Auto-sync are checked. To manage synchronization of individual accounts, tap an account to see their settings. Google Sync In Google, you can set synchronization for contacts, email and calendar. Tap to checkmark an item you would like to have auto-sync. Tap again to uncheck any for manual synchronization. To manually synchronize an item, tap the item. Note: You need a Google account to sync your calendar and appointments. 37 Connecting to a PC FM radio The FM radio allows you to listen to your favorite stations while on the move. A headset must be plugged into the 3.5 mm jack as it functions as an antenna. You can access the radio by tapping FM Radio from the Applications menu. Tap the power button on the upper right corner to turn the radio off. Multimedia playback Your smartphone allows you to enjoy multimedia content. The following formats are supported: Type Formats Audio playback MP3, AMR, WMA Ringtone MP3, MIDI, iMelody, WAVE, WMA Video recording 3GP, MPEG-4, H.263, H.264 Video playback 3GP, MPEG-4, H.263, H.264, WMV Adjusting the volume Adjust the volume of your phone using the volume button on the side of the phone. Setting the date and time To set the date and time, open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Date & time.Tip: If you travel frequently or live in an area that uses daylight saving time, activate Automatic from this menu. This will enable your smartphone to set the date and time based on information it receives from the network. Setting alarms There are two predefined alarms on your phone by default. Tap Clock in the Applications menu, and tap the alarm icon to edit alarm settings. You may: • Turn the alarm on or off. • Set the alarm time. • Set which days to repeat the alarm. • Set a ringtone. • Enable or disable vibrate. • Give it a label. Changing language and text options Set your location and language input preferences by opening the Applications menu and going to Settings > Language & keyboard. 38 FM radio Managing applications Closing an application To close an active application, go to Settings > Applications > Manage applications. Tap the Running tab, then tap the program you wish to close. Select Stop to close the program. Uninstalling an application You can remove programs installed on your smartphone to free up extra storage memory. Tap and hold a program icon from the Applications menu and drag it into the trash can on the bottom left hand corner. Alternatively, you can go to Settings from the Applications menu and select Applications > Manage applications. Tap the application you wish to uninstall, tap Uninstall and confirm the uninstall. Here you can allow programs from Unknown sources to be installed and Manage applications. Warning! You should only remove programs if you are familiar with the Android operating system. Restoring to factory settings You may perform a clean boot to restore your smartphone to the factory settings. Note: Before performing a reset, ensure that your smartphone is not locked. Press any key or tap the screen to see if the phone responds. Warning! You should only perform a clean boot when all other options have failed to restore your smartphone to an operational state. Warning! This will erase all your personal information, any contacts stored on your phone and any programs you installed. If your phone is responding to screen input Open Settings from the Applications menu, then tap Privacy > Factory data reset; click Reset phone and then Erase everything to format your phone. 39 Restoring to factory settings Accessories and Tips This chapter shows you how to use accessories with your smartphone, as well as provide useful tips for when you are using your smartphone. Using the headset Your smartphone can be used with a compatible headset with built-in microphone for handsfree use when making calls. Note: The headset needs to be purchased separately. To use the headset, plug it into the 3.5 mm headphone jack at the side of the phone. When the headset is plugged in, all audio is routed to the headset, and the speakers are turned off. • To answer an incoming call, press the button on the microphone. • Adjust the volume using the volume up/down button on the smartphone. • End the call by pressing the button again. Using a Bluetooth headset Your smartphone’s Bluetooth functions make it fully compatible with all Bluetooth headsets. This allows you to use the unit handsfree when making calls, without the inconvenience of wires. Creating a new access point When you need to add another GPRS/3G/EDGE connection on your phone, obtain the access point name and settings (including username and password if required) from your wireless service provider. 1. Open the Applications menu and tap Settings > Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Access Point Names. 2. Tap the Menu button and tap New APN. 3. Enter the APN settings. Tap an item to adjust it. 4. When you have finished tap the Menu button and tap Save. Important: Some providers and countries do not allow the use of a smartphone as a modem over HSDPA. Please check with your provider before attempting to do so. Inserting a microSD Card Your smartphone features a memory expansion slot that accepts a microSD Card to expand memory and storage capacity. Please refer to "Installing a SIM or microSD Card" on page 10 for instructions on installing a microSD Card. 40 Using the headset Appendix FAQ and troubleshooting This section lists frequently asked questions that may arise during the use of your smartphone, and gives easy answers and solutions to these questions. Aspect Question Answer

Audio Why is there no sound coming from the device? If the headset is plugged into the device, the speaker is automatically shut off. Disconnect the headset. Check that the device volume setting is not muted. Check that the volume control is not at its lowest setting. Multimedia files Why can’t I view my video files? You may be trying to view a video that is not supported. Refer to "Multimedia" on page 47. Why can’t I play my music files? You may be trying to play a file that is not supported. Refer to "Multimedia" on page 47. System information and performance How do I check the OS version of my device? Tap Settings > About phone to check the OS version (Build number) and other hardware and software information. Tap Settings > About phone to check the OS version (Build number) and other hardware and software information. Power I can’t turn on the device. The battery power may be depleted. Recharge the device. Refer to "Charging the battery" on page 9 for more information. RAM / ROM How do I check the RAM and ROM memory status? To check the ROM status, tap Settings > Storage. To check RAM status, tap Settings > Apps > RUNNING. Internal storage My device’s available internal storage is full or almost full. Uninstall applications to increase available storage. See "Uninstalling an application" on page 39. Unlock pattern I forgot my unlock pattern. After a certain number of wrong entries, you will be presented with an option to reset your pattern. Tap Forgot pattern? and enter your google account username and password. Note: You must have an active Google account on the smartphone.

Alternatively, you may restore your smartphone to factory settings. See "Restoring to factory settings" on page 39. 41 FAQ and troubleshooting Aspect Question Answer Heat The phone heats up when charging or making long duration calls. It is normal for the phone to heat up when charging. When charging is complete, it will return to its normal temperature. It is also normal for the phone to heat up during long periods of use, such as watching a video or a long phone conversation. Other sources of help For information on: Refer to: Up-to-date information regarding your acer.com smartphone mobile.acer.com Service enquiries acer.com/support Warnings and precautions • Do not use this product near water. • Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand or table. If the product falls, it could be seriously damaged. • Slots and openings are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating. These openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug or other similar surface. This product should never be placed near or over a radiator or heat register, or in a built-in installation unless proper ventilation is provided. • Never push objects of any kind into this product through cabinet slots as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the product. • To avoid damage of internal components and to prevent battery leakage, do not place the product on a vibrating surface. • Never use this product when engaging in sporting activities, exercising, or in any vibrating environment which may cause a short circuit or damage, and even a risk of explosion from the battery pack. CAUTION when listening to music To protect your hearing, follow these instructions. • Increase the volume gradually until you can hear clearly and comfortably. • Do not increase the volume level after your ears have adjusted. • Do not listen to music at high volumes for extended periods. • Do not increase the volume to block out noisy surroundings. • Decrease the volume if you can’t hear people speaking near you. Battery information This product uses a Lithium battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet and/or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 °C (140 °F). Failure to follow these 42 Other sources of help guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at low (below 0° C/32° F) or high (over 45° C/113° F) temperatures. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only Acer approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Acer approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to the ac charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15° C and 25° C (59° F and 77° F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Replacing the battery pack Your smartphone uses lithium batteries. Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. Warning! Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Additional safety information Your device and its enhancements may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment Warning! For safety reasons, turn off all wireless or radio transmitting devices when using your smartphone device under the following conditions. These devices may include, but are not limited to: wireless LAN (WLAN), Bluetooth and/or 3G. 43 Warnings and precautions Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any area, and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. To successfully transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure that the above separation distance instructions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and persons with hearing aids should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmitting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF transmissions. Pacemakers. Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm (6") be maintained between wireless devices and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the independent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following: • Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6") from the pacemaker. • Not carry the device near your pacemaker when the device is switched on. If you suspect interference, switch off your device, and move it. Hearing aids. Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If interference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injection systems, electronic anti-skid (anti-lock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly installed, and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wireless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an 44 Warnings and precautions explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmospheres are often, but not always, clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. Follow any restrictions. Do not use the device where blasting is in progress. Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, including this device, operate using radio signals, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You should never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of communication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. Disposal and recycling information Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more information on the Waste from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit  acer-group.com/public/Sustainability/sustainability01.htm Mercury advisory For projectors or electronic products containing an LCD/CRT monitor or display: Lamp(s) inside this product contain mercury and must be recycled or disposed of according to local, state or federal laws. For more information, contact the Electronic Industries Alliance at eiae.org. For lamp-specific disposal information, check lamprecycle.org. Taking care of your smartphone 1. DO take care not to scratch the screen of your smartphone. Keep the screen clean. When working with your smartphone, use your finger or fingernail. Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the screen surface. 2. DO NOT expose your smartphone to rain or moisture. Do not let water enter the circuitry through the front panel buttons or expansion slots. In general, treat your smartphone as you would a mobile phone or other small electronic device. 3. DO be careful not to drop your smartphone or subject it to any strong impact. Do not place your smartphone in your back pocket. 4. DO NOT expose your smartphone to extreme temperatures. For example, do not leave your smart- phone on the dashboard of a car on a hot day or when temperatures are below freezing point. Also, keep it away from heaters and other sources of heat. 5. DO NOT use or store your smartphone in any location that is dusty, damp or wet. 6. DO use a soft, damp cloth to clean your smartphone. If the surface of the screen becomes soiled, clean it with a soft cloth moistened with diluted window-cleaning solution. 45 Emergency calls 7. DO NOT press down on the screen with force, otherwise you may crack the screen. 46 Taking care of your smartphone Specifications Performance • MediaTek MT6575M, 1 GHz • System memory: • 512 MB of RAM • 512 MB of ROM • Android operating system Display • 3.5" HVGA TFT, capacitive touch panel • 320 x 480 resolution Multimedia Formats supported: Type Formats

Audio playback MP3, AMR, WMA

USB connector • Micro USB connector • USB client • DC power-in (5 V, 1 A) Connectivity • Bluetooth 3.0 with EDR • IEEE Wi-Fi 802.11b/g/n • GSM 850 / 900 / 1800 / 1900 MHz • UMTS 900 / 2100 MHz • HSUPA / HSDPA / GPRS / EDGE • GPS / aGPS Camera • 3-megapixel Expansion • microSD memory card slot (up to 32 GB) Ringtone MP3, MIDI, iMelody, WAVE, WMA

Video recording 3GP, MPEG-4, H.263, H.264 Video playback 3GP, MPEG-4, H.263, H.264, WMV

47 Specifications Battery • Rechargeable high density 1300 mAh Lithium-ion battery (replaceable) Note: Length of battery operation will depend on power consumption which is based on system resource use. For example, constantly using the backlight or using power- demanding applications will shorten battery life between charges. Dimensions Height 110 mm Width 61.5 mm Thickness 12.25 mm Weight 110 g (with battery) 48 Specifications Safety Battery information This product uses a Lithium-ion battery. Do not use it in a humid, wet and/or corrosive environment. Do not put, store or leave your product in or near a heat source, in a high temperature location, in strong direct sunlight, in a microwave oven or in a pressurized container, and do not expose it to temperatures over 60 °C (140 °F). Failure to follow these guidelines may cause the battery to leak acid, become hot, explode or ignite and cause injury and/or damage. Do not pierce, open or disassemble the battery. If the battery leaks and you come into contact with the leaked fluids, rinse thoroughly with water and seek medical attention immediately. For safety reasons, and to prolong the lifetime of the battery, charging will not occur at low (below 0 °C/32 °F) or high (over 45 °C/113 °F) temperatures. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal, buy a new battery. Use only manufacturer approved batteries, and recharge your battery only with manufacturer approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to the AC charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging indicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. These look like metal strips on the battery. This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15 °C and 25 °C (59 °F and 77 °F). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Replacing the battery Your smartphone uses a Lithium-ion battery. Replace the battery with the same type as that which came bundled with your product. Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. 49 Safety 50 SafetyWarning! Batteries may explode if not handled properly. Do not disassemble or dispose of them in fire. Keep them away from children. Follow local regulations when disposing of used batteries. Disposal and recycling information Do not throw this electronic device into the trash when discarding. To minimize pollution and ensure utmost protection of the global environment, please recycle. For more information on the Waste from Electrical and Electronics Equipment (WEEE) regulations, visit acer- group.com/public/Sustainability/sustainability01.htm EEE yönetmeligine uygundur. It is compliant with EEE regulations. RoHS compliance This product is in compliance with Directive 2002/95/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 27 January 2003, on the restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment (RoHS) and its amendments. Prevention of hearing loss A pleine puissance, l’écoute prolongée du baladeur peut endommager l’oreille de l’utilisateur. Note: For France, mobile headphones or earphones for this device have been tested to comply with the Sound Pressure requirement laid down in the applicable NF EN 50332-1:2000 and/or NF EN 50332-2:2003 standards as required by French Article L. 5232-1. Caution: Permanent hearing loss may occur if earphones or headphones are used at high volume for prolonged periods of time. Wireless operation channels for different domains N. America 2.412-2.462 GHz Ch01 through Ch11 Japan 2.412-2.484 GHz Ch01 through Ch14 Europe ETSI 2.412-2.472 GHz Ch01 through Ch13 List of National Codes This equipment may be operated in the following countries: Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Certificate Information (SAR) This device meets the EU requirements (1999/519/EC) on the limitation of exposure of the general public to electromagnetic fields by way of health protection. The limits are part of extensive recommendations for the protection of the general public. These recommendations have been developed and checked by independent scientific organizations through regular and thorough evaluations of scientific studies. To guarantee the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, the limits include a significant safety buffer. Before radio devices can be put in circulation, their agreement with European laws or limits must be confirmed; only then may the CE symbol be applied. The unit of measurement for the European Council's recommended limit for mobile telephones is the "Specific Absorption Rate" (SAR). This SAR limit is 2.0 W/kg, averaged over 10 g of body tissue. It meets the requirements of the International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) and was included in the European Standard EN 50360 for mobile radio devices. The SAR regulation for mobile telephones is in line with European Standard EN 62209-1. The maximum SAR value is calculated at the highest output level in all frequency bands of the mobile telephone. For body worn operation, this phone (EU model) has been tested and meets the ICNIRP exposure guidelines, and was included in the European Standard EN 62311 and EN 62209-2 for use with accessories that contain no metal and that position the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm from the body. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with ICNIRP exposure guidelines. If you do not use a body-worn ISO 3166 2 letter code ATBECYCZDKEEFIFRDEGRHU IEITLVLTLU Country Malta Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Bulgaria Romania Turkey ISO 3166 2 letter code MTNTPLPTSKSLESSEGB ISLINOCHBGROTR 51 Safety accessory and are not holding the phone at the ear, position the handset a minimum of 1.5 cm from your body when the phone is switched on. During use, the actual SAR level is usually much lower than the maximum value, because the mobile telephone works in different output levels. It only transmits with as much output as is required to reach the network. In general the following applies: The closer you are to a base station, the lower the transmission output of your mobile telephone. The tested SAR of this device is as follows: NCC CE Head (W/kg) Head (W/kg) Body (W/kg) 0.662 0.528 0.644 NCC warning 警語經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司、商號或使用者均不得擅自變更 頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應 立即停用,並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線電通信。 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾, 減少電磁波影響,請妥善使用。 Note: SAR 標準值 2.0 W/kg; 送測產品實測值為 : 0.662 W/kg 52 Safety Certification logos To view the certification logos on your device: tap Settings > About phone > Legal information > Certification logo. Lithium-ion battery warning ATTENZIONE! Rischio di esplosione della batteria se sostituita in modo errato. Sostituire la batteria con un una di tipo uguale o equivalente con- sigliata dalla fabbrica. Non disperdere le batterie nell’ambiente. VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßen Austausch der Bat- terie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einem vom Hersteller empfohle- nem ähnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. ADVARSELI! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren. VARNING! Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma bat- terityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattill- verkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS! Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vai- hda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan sousittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistagan ohjeiden mukaisesti. ATTENTION! Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du mêre type ou d’ un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. 53 Safety ADVARSEL! Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabri- kanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner. 54 Safety Acer 0682 Incorporated Date: September 20, 2012 Declaration of Conformity We, of 8F., Acer No. Incorporated, 88, Sec. 1, Xintai  5th Rd., Xizhi Dist, New Taipei City, 22181, Taiwan Declare under sole responsibility that the product: Description: Model: Smart Z110 Handheld To which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents: • EN 301 511 V9.0.2 • EN 301 908-1 V5.2.1; EN 301 908-2 V5.2.1 • EN 300 328 V1.7.1 • EN 300 440-1 V1.6.1; EN 300 440-2 V1.4.1 • EN 301 489-1 V1.9.2; EN 301 489-3 V1.4.1; EN 301 489-7 V1.3.1 • EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1; EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1 • EN 55022:2010/AC:2011 Class B; EN 55024:2010 • EN 55013:2001/A1:2003/A2:2006; EN 55020:2007/A11:2011 • EN 60950-1: 2006+A11:2009+A1:2010+A12:2011 • EN 50332-1:2000; EN 50332-2:2003 • EN 50360:2001/AC:2006; EN 62311:2008; EN 62209-1:2006;EN 62209-2:2010; EN 62479:2010 • RoHS Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of Use of certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic Equipment. • The maximum concentration values of the restricted substances by weight in homogenous material are: Lead 0.1% Polybrominated Biphenyls (PBB’s) 0.1% Mercury 0.1% Polybrominated Diphenyl Ethers (PBDE’s) 0.1% Hexavalent Chromium 0.1% Cadmium 0.01% We hereby declare that the above named product is in conformance to all the essential requirements of the R&TTE Directive (99/5/EC) issued by the Commission of the European Community. The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex [IV] • of R&TTE directive Article 1999/5/EC 3.1 (a) Health has been and followed Safety related to Articles: • R&TTE Article 3.1 (b) EMC • R&TTE Article 3.2 Spectrum Usage with CETECOM, the involvement Untertuerkheimer of the following Str. 6 Notified – 10 66117 Body: Saarbruecken Identification The technical mark: documentation 0682 (Notified relevant Body) to the CE above equipment will be held at: Acer 8F., No. Incorporated 88, Sec. 1, Xintai 5th Rd., Xizhi Dist, New Taipei City, 22181, Taiwan 55 Authorized person: Name: Harriot SL Lee For the addresses/telephone numbers of Acer service centers, please refer to the warranty card. 56


FREE ENGLISH PDF

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

USER GUIDE - USER MANUAL

OWNER GUIDE - OWNER MANUAL

REFERENCE GUIDE - REFERENCE MANUAL

INSTRUCTION GUIDE - INSTRUCTION MANUAL